Preamble
Copyright (c) 2017-2024, The Khronos Group Inc.
This Specification is protected by copyright laws and contains material proprietary to Khronos. Except as described by these terms, it or any components may not be reproduced, republished, distributed, transmitted, displayed, broadcast or otherwise exploited in any manner without the express prior written permission of Khronos.
Khronos grants a conditional copyright license to use and reproduce the unmodified Specification for any purpose, without fee or royalty, EXCEPT no licenses to any patent, trademark or other intellectual property rights are granted under these terms.
Khronos makes no, and expressly disclaims any, representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding this Specification, including, without limitation: merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, non-infringement of any intellectual property, correctness, accuracy, completeness, timeliness, and reliability. Under no circumstances will Khronos, or any of its Promoters, Contributors or Members, or their respective partners, officers, directors, employees, agents or representatives be liable for any damages, whether direct, indirect, special or consequential damages for lost revenues, lost profits, or otherwise, arising from or in connection with these materials.
This document contains extensions which are not ratified by Khronos, and as such is not a ratified Specification, though it contains text from (and is a superset of) the ratified OpenXR Specification that can be found at https://registry.khronos.org/OpenXR/specs/1.0-khr/html/xrspec.html (core with KHR extensions).
The Khronos Intellectual Property Rights Policy defines the terms 'Scope', 'Compliant Portion', and 'Necessary Patent Claims'.
Some parts of this Specification are purely informative and so are EXCLUDED from the Scope of this Specification. The Document Conventions section of the Introduction defines how these parts of the Specification are identified.
Where this Specification uses technical terminology, defined in the Glossary or otherwise, that refer to enabling technologies that are not expressly set forth in this Specification, those enabling technologies are EXCLUDED from the Scope of this Specification. For clarity, enabling technologies not disclosed with particularity in this Specification (e.g. semiconductor manufacturing technology, hardware architecture, processor architecture or microarchitecture, memory architecture, compiler technology, object oriented technology, basic operating system technology, compression technology, algorithms, and so on) are NOT to be considered expressly set forth; only those application program interfaces and data structures disclosed with particularity are included in the Scope of this Specification.
For purposes of the Khronos Intellectual Property Rights Policy as it relates to the definition of Necessary Patent Claims, all recommended or optional features, behaviors and functionality set forth in this Specification, if implemented, are considered to be included as Compliant Portions.
Khronos® and Vulkan® are registered trademarks, and glTF™ is a trademark of The Khronos Group Inc. OpenXR™ is a trademark owned by The Khronos Group Inc. and is registered as a trademark in China, the European Union, Japan and the United Kingdom. OpenGL® is a registered trademark and the OpenGL ES™ and OpenGL SC™ logos are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Enterprise used under license by Khronos. All other product names, trademarks, and/or company names are used solely for identification and belong to their respective owners.
1. Introduction
This chapter is informative except for the section on Normative Terminology.
This document, referred to as the "OpenXR Specification" or just the "Specification" hereafter, describes OpenXR: what it is, how it acts, and what is required to implement it. We assume that the reader has a basic understanding of computer graphics and the technologies involved in virtual and augmented reality. This means familiarity with the essentials of computer graphics algorithms and terminology, modern GPUs (Graphic Processing Units), tracking technologies, head mounted devices, and input modalities.
The canonical version of the Specification is available in the official OpenXR Registry, located at URL
1.1. What is OpenXR?
OpenXR is an API (Application Programming Interface) for XR applications. XR refers to a continuum of real-and-virtual combined environments generated by computers through human-machine interaction and is inclusive of the technologies associated with virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR) and mixed reality (MR). OpenXR is the interface between an application and an in-process or out-of-process "XR runtime system", or just "runtime" hereafter. The runtime may handle such functionality as frame composition, peripheral management, and raw tracking information.
Optionally, a runtime may support device layer plugins which allow access to a variety of hardware across a commonly defined interface.
1.2. The Programmer’s View of OpenXR
To the application programmer, OpenXR is a set of functions that interface with a runtime to perform commonly required operations such as accessing controller/peripheral state, getting current and/or predicted tracking positions, and submitting rendered frames.
A typical OpenXR program begins with a call to create an instance which establishes a connection to a runtime. Then a call is made to create a system which selects for use a physical display and a subset of input, tracking, and graphics devices. Subsequently a call is made to create buffers into which the application will render one or more views using the appropriate graphics APIs for the platform. Finally calls are made to create a session and begin the application’s XR rendering loop.
1.3. The Implementor’s View of OpenXR
To the runtime implementor, OpenXR is a set of functions that control the operation of the XR system and establishes the lifecycle of a XR application.
The implementor’s task is to provide a software library on the host which implements the OpenXR API, while mapping the work for each OpenXR function to the graphics hardware as appropriate for the capabilities of the device.
1.4. Our View of OpenXR
We view OpenXR as a mechanism for interacting with VR/AR/MR systems in a platform-agnostic way.
We expect this model to result in a specification that satisfies the needs of both programmers and runtime implementors. It does not, however, necessarily provide a model for implementation. A runtime implementation must produce results conforming to those produced by the specified methods, but may carry out particular procedures in ways that are more efficient than the one specified.
1.5. Filing Bug Reports
Issues with and bug reports on the OpenXR Specification and the API Registry can be filed in the Khronos OpenXR GitHub repository, located at URL
Please tag issues with appropriate labels, such as “Specification”, “Ref Pages” or “Registry”, to help us triage and assign them appropriately. Unfortunately, GitHub does not currently let users who do not have write access to the repository set GitHub labels on issues. In the meantime, they can be added to the title line of the issue set in brackets, e.g. “[Specification]”.
1.6. Document Conventions
The OpenXR specification is intended for use by both implementors of the API and application developers seeking to make use of the API, forming a contract between these parties. Specification text may address either party; typically the intended audience can be inferred from context, though some sections are defined to address only one of these parties. (For example, Valid Usage sections only address application developers). Any requirements, prohibitions, recommendations or options defined by normative terminology are imposed only on the audience of that text.
1.6.1. Normative Terminology
The key words must, required, should, may, and optional in this document, when denoted as above, are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119:
- must
-
When used alone, this word, or the term required, means that the definition is an absolute requirement of the specification. When followed by not (“must not” ), the phrase means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the specification.
- should
-
When used alone, this word means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and carefully weighed before choosing a different course. When followed by not (“should not”), the phrase means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior described with this label.
- may
-
This word, or the adjective optional, means that an item is truly optional. One vendor may choose to include the item because a particular marketplace requires it or because the vendor feels that it enhances the product while another vendor may omit the same item.
The additional terms can and cannot are to be interpreted as follows:
- can
-
This word means that the particular behavior described is a valid choice for an application, and is never used to refer to runtime behavior.
- cannot
-
This word means that the particular behavior described is not achievable by an application, for example, an entry point does not exist.
There is an important distinction between cannot and must not, as used in this Specification. Cannot means something the application literally is unable to express or accomplish through the API, while must not means something that the application is capable of expressing through the API, but that the consequences of doing so are undefined and potentially unrecoverable for the runtime. |
2. Fundamentals
2.1. API Version Numbers and Semantics
Multi-part version numbers are used in several places in the OpenXR API.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef uint64_t XrVersion;
In each such use, the API major version number, minor version number, and
patch version number are packed into a 64-bit integer, referred to as
XrVersion
, as follows:
Differences in any of the version numbers indicate a change to the API, with each part of the version number indicating a different scope of change, as follows.
Note
The rules below apply to OpenXR versions 1.0 or later. Prerelease versions of OpenXR may use different rules for versioning. |
A difference in patch version numbers indicates that some usually small part of the specification or header has been modified, typically to fix a bug, and may have an impact on the behavior of existing functionality. Differences in the patch version number must affect neither full compatibility nor backwards compatibility between two versions, nor may it add additional interfaces to the API. Runtimes may use patch version number to determine whether to enable implementation changes, such as bug fixes, that impact functionality. Runtimes should document any changes that are tied to the patch version. Application developers should retest their application on all runtimes they support after compiling with a new version.
A difference in minor version numbers indicates that some amount of new functionality has been added. This will usually include new interfaces in the header, and may also include behavior changes and bug fixes. Functionality may be deprecated in a minor revision, but must not be removed. When a new minor version is introduced, the patch version is reset to 0, and each minor revision maintains its own set of patch versions. Differences in the minor version number should not affect backwards compatibility, but will affect full compatibility.
A difference in major version numbers indicates a large set of changes to the API, potentially including new functionality and header interfaces, behavioral changes, removal of deprecated features, modification or outright replacement of any feature, and is thus very likely to break compatibility. Differences in the major version number will typically require significant modification to application code in order for it to function properly.
The following table attempts to detail the changes that may occur versus when they must not be updated (indicating the next version number must be updated instead) during an update to any of the major, minor, or patch version numbers:
Reason |
Major Version |
Minor Version |
Patch Version |
Extensions Added/Removed* |
may |
may |
may |
Spec-Optional Behavior Changed* |
may |
may |
may |
Spec Required Behavior Changed* |
may |
may |
must not |
Core Interfaces Added* |
may |
may |
must not |
Weak Deprecation* |
may |
may |
must not |
Strong Deprecation* |
may |
must not |
must not |
Core Interfaces Changed/Removed* |
may |
must not |
must not |
In the above table, the following identify the various cases in detail:
Extensions Added/Removed |
An extension may be added or removed with a change at this patch level. |
Specification-Optional Behavior Changed |
Some optional behavior laid out in this specification has changed. Usually this will involve a change in behavior that is marked with the normatives should or may. For example, a runtime that previously did not validate a particular use case may now begin validating that use case. |
Specification-Required Behavior Changed |
A behavior of runtimes that is required by this specification may have changed. For example, a previously optional validation may now have become mandatory for runtimes. |
Core Interfaces Added |
New interfaces may have been added to this specification (and to the OpenXR header file) in revisions at this level. |
Weak Deprecation |
An interface may have been weakly deprecated at this level. This may happen if there is now a better way to accomplish the same thing. Applications making this call should behave the same as before the deprecation, but following the new path may be more performant, less latent, or otherwise yield better results. It is possible that some runtimes may choose to give run-time warnings that the feature has been weakly deprecated and will likely be strongly deprecated or removed in the future. |
Strong Deprecation |
An interface may have been strongly deprecated at this level. This means that the interface must still exist (so applications that are compiled against it will still run) but it may now be a no-op, or it may be that its behavior has been significantly changed. It may be that this functionality is no longer necessary, or that its functionality has been subsumed by another call. This should not break an application, but some behavior may be different or unanticipated. |
Interfaces Changed/Removed |
An interface may have been changed — with different parameters or return types — at this level. An interface or feature may also have been removed entirely. It is almost certain that rebuilding applications will be required. |
2.2. String Encoding
This API uses strings as input and output for some functions.
Unless otherwise specified, all such strings are NULL
terminated UTF-8
encoded case-sensitive character arrays.
2.3. Threading Behavior
The OpenXR API is intended to provide scalable performance when used on multiple host threads. All functions must support being called concurrently from multiple threads, but certain parameters, or components of parameters are defined to be externally synchronized. This means that the caller must guarantee that no more than one thread is using such a parameter at a given time.
More precisely, functions use simple stores to update software structures representing objects. A parameter declared as externally synchronized may have its software structures updated at any time during the host execution of the function. If two functions operate on the same object and at least one of the functions declares the object to be externally synchronized, then the caller must guarantee not only that the functions do not execute simultaneously, but also that the two functions are separated by an appropriate memory barrier if needed.
For all functions which destroy an object handle, the application must externally synchronize the object handle parameter and any child handles.
2.4. Multiprocessing Behavior
The OpenXR API does not explicitly recognize nor require support for multiple processes using the runtime simultaneously, nor does it prevent a runtime from providing such support.
2.5. Runtime
An OpenXR runtime is software which implements the OpenXR API. There may be more than one OpenXR runtime installed on a system, but only one runtime can be active at any given time.
2.6. Extensions
OpenXR is an extensible API that grows through the addition of new features. Similar to other Khronos APIs, extensions may expose new OpenXR functions or modify the behavior of existing OpenXR functions. Extensions are optional and therefore must be enabled by the application before the extended functionality is made available. Because extensions are optional, they may be implemented only on a subset of runtimes, graphics platforms, or operating systems. Therefore, an application should first query which extensions are available before enabling.
The application queries the available list of extensions using the xrEnumerateInstanceExtensionProperties function. Once an application determines which target extensions are supported, it can enable some subset of them during the call to xrCreateInstance.
OpenXR extensions have unique names that convey information about what functionality is provided. The names have the following format:
For example: XR_KHR_composition_layer_cube
is an OpenXR extension
created by the Khronos (KHR) OpenXR Working Group to support cube
composition layers.
The public list of available extensions known at the time of this specification being generated appears in the List of Extensions appendix at the end of this document.
2.7. API Layers
OpenXR is designed to be a layered API, which means that a user or application may insert API layers between the application and the runtime implementation. These API layers provide additional functionality by intercepting OpenXR functions from the layer above and then performing different operations than would otherwise be performed without the layer. In the simplest cases, the layer simply calls the next layer down with the same arguments, but a more complex layer may implement API functionality that is not present in the layers or runtime below it. This mechanism is essentially an architected "function shimming" or "intercept" feature that is designed into OpenXR and meant to replace more informal methods of "hooking" API calls.
2.7.1. Examples of API Layers
Validation Layer
The layered API approach employed by OpenXR allows for the expensive validation of correct API usage to be implemented in a "validation" layer. This layer allows the application developer to develop their application with the validation layer active to ensure that the application is using the API correctly. The validation layer confirms that the application has set up object state correctly, has provided the required data for each function, ensures that required resources are available, etc. If the validation layer detects a problem, it issues an error message that can be logged or captured by the application via a callback. After the developer has determined that the application is correct, they turn off the validation layer to allow the application to run in a production environment without repeatedly incurring the validation expense.
2.7.2. Naming API Layers
To organize API layer names and prevent collisions in the API layer name namespace, API layers must be named using the following convention:
XR_APILAYER_<VENDOR-TAG>_short_name
Vendors are responsible for registering a vendor tag with the OpenXR working group and just like for implementors, they must maintain their vendor namespace.
Example of an API layer name produced by the Acme company for the "check best practices" API layer:
XR_APILAYER_ACME_check_best_practices
2.7.3. Activating API Layers
Application Activation
Applications can determine the API layers that are available to them by calling the xrEnumerateApiLayerProperties function to obtain a list of available API layers. Applications then can select the desired API layers from this list and provide them to the xrCreateInstance function when creating an instance.
System Activation
Application users or users performing roles such as system integrator or system administrator may configure a system to activate API layers without involvement from the applications. These platform-dependent steps may include the installation of API layer-related files, setting environment variables, or other platform-specific operations. The options that are available for configuring the API layers in this manner are also dependent on the platform and/or runtime.
2.7.4. API Layer Extensions
API layers may implement OpenXR functions that may or may not be supported by the underlying runtime. In order to expose these new features, the API layer must expose this functionality in the form of an OpenXR extension. It must not expose new OpenXR functions without an associated extension.
For example, an OpenXR API-logging API layer might expose an API function to
allow the application to turn logging on for only a portion of its
execution.
Since new functions must be exposed through an extension, the vendor has
created an extension called XR_ACME_logging_on_off
to contain these new
functions.
The application should query if the API layer supports the extension and
then, only if it exists, enable both the extension and the API layer by name
during xrCreateInstance.
To find out what extensions an API layer supports, an application must first verify that the API layer exists on the current system by calling xrEnumerateApiLayerProperties. After verifying an API layer of interest exists, the application then should call xrEnumerateInstanceExtensionProperties and provide the API layer name as the first parameter. This will return the list of extensions implemented internally in that API layer.
2.8. Type Aliasing
Type aliasing refers to the situation in which the actual type of a element
does not match the declared type.
Some C and C++ compilers can be configured to assume that the actual type
matches the declared type, and may be so configured by default at common
optimization levels.
Without this, otherwise undefined behavior may occur.
This compiler feature is typically referred to as "strict aliasing," and it
can usually be enabled or disabled via compiler options.
The OpenXR specification does not support strict aliasing, as there are some
cases in which an application intentionally provides a struct with a type
that differs from the declared type.
For example, XrFrameEndInfo::layers
is an array of type
const
XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader code:* const
.
However, the array must be of one of the specific layer types, such as
XrCompositionLayerQuad.
Similarly, xrEnumerateSwapchainImages accepts an array of
XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader, whereas the actual type passed must be an
array of a type such as
XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR.
For OpenXR to work correctly, the compiler must support the type aliasing described here.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#if !defined(XR_MAY_ALIAS)
#if defined(__clang__) || (defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ > 4))
#define XR_MAY_ALIAS __attribute__((__may_alias__))
#else
#define XR_MAY_ALIAS
#endif
#endif
As a convenience, some types and pointers that are known at specification time to alias values of different types have been annotated with the XR_MAY_ALIAS definition. If this macro is not defined before including OpenXR headers, and a new enough Clang or GCC compiler is used, it will be defined to the compiler-specific attribute annotation to inform these compilers that those pointers may alias. However, there is no guarantee that all aliasing types or pointers have been correctly marked with this macro, so thorough testing is still recommended if you choose (at your own risk) to permit your compiler to perform type-based aliasing analysis.
2.9. Valid Usage
Valid usage defines a set of conditions which must be met in order to achieve well-defined run-time behavior in an application. These conditions depend only on API state, and the parameters or objects whose usage is constrained by the condition.
Some valid usage conditions have dependencies on runtime limits or feature availability. It is possible to validate these conditions against the API’s minimum or maximum supported values for these limits and features, or some subset of other known values.
Valid usage conditions should apply to a function or structure where complete information about the condition would be known during execution of an application. This is such that a validation API layer or linter can be written directly against these statements at the point they are specified.
2.9.1. Implicit Valid Usage
Some valid usage conditions apply to all functions and structures in the API, unless explicitly denoted otherwise for a specific function or structure. These conditions are considered implicit. Implicit valid usage conditions are described in detail below.
2.9.2. Valid Usage for Object Handles
Any input parameter to a function that is an object handle must be a valid object handle, unless otherwise specified. An object handle is valid if and only if:
There are contexts in which an object handle is optional or otherwise
unspecified.
In those cases, the API uses XR_NULL_HANDLE, which has the integer
value 0
.
2.9.3. Valid Usage for Pointers
Any parameter that is a pointer must be a valid pointer when the specification indicates that the runtime uses the pointer. A pointer is valid if and only if it points at memory containing values of the number and type(s) expected by the function, and all fundamental types accessed through the pointer (e.g. as elements of an array or as members of a structure) satisfy the alignment requirements of the host processor.
2.9.4. Valid Usage for Enumerated Types
Any parameter of an enumerated type must be a valid enumerant for that type. An enumerant is valid if and only if the enumerant is defined as part of the enumerated type in question.
2.9.5. Valid Usage for Flags
A collection of flags is represented by a bitmask using the type
XrFlags64
:
typedef uint64_t XrFlags64;
Bitmasks are passed to many functions and structures to compactly represent
options and are stored in memory defined by the XrFlags64
type.
But the API does not use the XrFlags64
type directly.
Instead, a Xr*Flags
type is used which is an alias of the
XrFlags64
type.
The API also defines a set of constant bit definitions used to set the
bitmasks.
Any Xr*Flags
member or parameter used in the API must be a valid
combination of bit flags.
A valid combination is either zero or the bitwise OR
of valid bit
flags.
A bit flag is valid if and only if:
2.9.6. Valid Usage for Structure Types
Any parameter that is a structure containing a type
member must have
a value of type
which is a valid XrStructureType value matching
the type of the structure.
As a general rule, the name of this value is obtained by taking the
structure name, stripping the leading Xr
, prefixing each capital letter
with an underscore, converting the entire resulting string to upper case,
and prefixing it with XR_TYPE_
.
The only exceptions to this rule are API and Operating System names which are converted in a way that produces a more readable value:
2.9.7. Valid Usage for Structure Pointer Chains
Any structure containing a void*
next
member must have a value
of next
that is either NULL
, or points to a valid structure that
also contains type
and next
member values.
The set of structures connected by next
pointers is referred to as a
next
chain.
In order to use a structure type defined by an extension in a next
chain, the proper extension must have been previously enabled during
xrCreateInstance.
A runtime must ignore all unrecognized structures in a next
chain,
including those associated with an extension that has not been enabled.
Some structures for use in a chain are described in the core OpenXR specification and are mentioned in the Member Descriptions. Any structure described in this document intended for use in a chain is mentioned in a "See also" list in the implicit valid usage of the structure they chain to. Most chained structures are associated with extensions, and are described in the base OpenXR Specification under the List of Extensions. Vendor-specific extensions may be found there as well, or may only be available from the vendor’s website or internal document repositories.
Unless otherwise specified: Chained structs which are output structs may be modified by the runtime with the exception of the type and next fields. Upon return from any function, all type and next fields in the chain must be unmodified.
Useful Base Structures
As a convenience to runtimes and layers needing to iterate through a structure pointer chain, the OpenXR API provides the following base structures:
The XrBaseInStructure structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrBaseInStructure {
XrStructureType type;
const struct XrBaseInStructure* next;
} XrBaseInStructure;
XrBaseInStructure can be used to facilitate iterating through a read-only structure pointer chain.
The XrBaseOutStructure structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrBaseOutStructure {
XrStructureType type;
struct XrBaseOutStructure* next;
} XrBaseOutStructure;
XrBaseOutStructure can be used to facilitate iterating through a structure pointer chain that returns data back to the application.
These structures allow for some type safety and can be used by OpenXR API functions that operate on generic inputs and outputs.
Next Chain Structure Uniqueness
Applications should ensure that they create and insert no more than one
occurrence of each type of extension structure in a given next
chain.
Other components of OpenXR (such as the OpenXR loader or an API Layer) may
insert duplicate structures into this chain.
This provides those components the ability to update a structure that
appears in the next
chain by making a modified copy of that same
structure and placing the new version at the beginning of the chain.
The benefit of allowing this duplication is each component is no longer
required to create a copy of the entire next
chain just to update one
structure.
When duplication is present, all other OpenXR components must process only
the first instance of a structure of a given type, and then ignore all
instances of a structure of that same type.
If a component makes such a structure copy, and the original structure is also used to return content, then that component must copy the necessary content from the copied structure and into the original version of the structure upon completion of the function prior to proceeding back up the call stack. This is to ensure that OpenXR behavior is consistent whether or not that particular OpenXR component is present and/or enabled on the system.
2.9.8. Valid Usage for Nested Structures
The above conditions also apply recursively to members of structures provided as input to a function, either as a direct argument to the function, or themselves a member of another structure.
Specifics on valid usage of each function are covered in their individual sections.
2.10. Return Codes
The core API is designed to capture most, but not all, instances of incorrect usage. As such, most functions provide return codes. Functions in the API return their status via return codes that are in one of the two categories below.
typedef enum XrResult {
XR_SUCCESS = 0,
XR_TIMEOUT_EXPIRED = 1,
XR_SESSION_LOSS_PENDING = 3,
XR_EVENT_UNAVAILABLE = 4,
XR_SPACE_BOUNDS_UNAVAILABLE = 7,
XR_SESSION_NOT_FOCUSED = 8,
XR_FRAME_DISCARDED = 9,
XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE = -1,
XR_ERROR_RUNTIME_FAILURE = -2,
XR_ERROR_OUT_OF_MEMORY = -3,
XR_ERROR_API_VERSION_UNSUPPORTED = -4,
XR_ERROR_INITIALIZATION_FAILED = -6,
XR_ERROR_FUNCTION_UNSUPPORTED = -7,
XR_ERROR_FEATURE_UNSUPPORTED = -8,
XR_ERROR_EXTENSION_NOT_PRESENT = -9,
XR_ERROR_LIMIT_REACHED = -10,
XR_ERROR_SIZE_INSUFFICIENT = -11,
XR_ERROR_HANDLE_INVALID = -12,
XR_ERROR_INSTANCE_LOST = -13,
XR_ERROR_SESSION_RUNNING = -14,
XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_RUNNING = -16,
XR_ERROR_SESSION_LOST = -17,
XR_ERROR_SYSTEM_INVALID = -18,
XR_ERROR_PATH_INVALID = -19,
XR_ERROR_PATH_COUNT_EXCEEDED = -20,
XR_ERROR_PATH_FORMAT_INVALID = -21,
XR_ERROR_PATH_UNSUPPORTED = -22,
XR_ERROR_LAYER_INVALID = -23,
XR_ERROR_LAYER_LIMIT_EXCEEDED = -24,
XR_ERROR_SWAPCHAIN_RECT_INVALID = -25,
XR_ERROR_SWAPCHAIN_FORMAT_UNSUPPORTED = -26,
XR_ERROR_ACTION_TYPE_MISMATCH = -27,
XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_READY = -28,
XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_STOPPING = -29,
XR_ERROR_TIME_INVALID = -30,
XR_ERROR_REFERENCE_SPACE_UNSUPPORTED = -31,
XR_ERROR_FILE_ACCESS_ERROR = -32,
XR_ERROR_FILE_CONTENTS_INVALID = -33,
XR_ERROR_FORM_FACTOR_UNSUPPORTED = -34,
XR_ERROR_FORM_FACTOR_UNAVAILABLE = -35,
XR_ERROR_API_LAYER_NOT_PRESENT = -36,
XR_ERROR_CALL_ORDER_INVALID = -37,
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_DEVICE_INVALID = -38,
XR_ERROR_POSE_INVALID = -39,
XR_ERROR_INDEX_OUT_OF_RANGE = -40,
XR_ERROR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_UNSUPPORTED = -41,
XR_ERROR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_UNSUPPORTED = -42,
XR_ERROR_NAME_DUPLICATED = -44,
XR_ERROR_NAME_INVALID = -45,
XR_ERROR_ACTIONSET_NOT_ATTACHED = -46,
XR_ERROR_ACTIONSETS_ALREADY_ATTACHED = -47,
XR_ERROR_LOCALIZED_NAME_DUPLICATED = -48,
XR_ERROR_LOCALIZED_NAME_INVALID = -49,
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING = -50,
XR_ERROR_RUNTIME_UNAVAILABLE = -51,
// Provided by XR_KHR_android_thread_settings
XR_ERROR_ANDROID_THREAD_SETTINGS_ID_INVALID_KHR = -1000003000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_android_thread_settings
XR_ERROR_ANDROID_THREAD_SETTINGS_FAILURE_KHR = -1000003001,
XR_RESULT_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrResult;
All return codes in the API are reported via XrResult return values.
Some common suffixes shared across many of the return codes are defined below:
-
_INVALID
: The specified handle, atom or value is formatted incorrectly, or the specified handle was never created or has been destroyed. -
_UNSUPPORTED
: The specified handle, atom, enumerant or value is formatted correctly but cannot be used for the lifetime of this function’s parent handle. -
_UNAVAILABLE
: The specified handle, atom, enumerant or value is supported by this function’s parent handle but not at this moment.
Success Codes
Enum | Description |
---|---|
|
Function successfully completed. |
|
The specified timeout time occurred before the operation could complete. |
|
The session will be lost soon. |
|
No event was available. |
|
The space’s bounds are not known at the moment. |
|
The session is not in the focused state. |
|
A frame has been discarded from composition. |
Error Codes
Enum | Description |
---|---|
|
The function usage was invalid in some way. |
|
The runtime failed to handle the function in an unexpected way that is not covered by another error result. |
|
A memory allocation has failed. |
|
The runtime does not support the requested API version. |
|
Initialization of object could not be completed. |
|
The requested function was not found or is otherwise unsupported. |
|
The requested feature is not supported. |
|
A requested extension is not supported. |
|
The runtime supports no more of the requested resource. |
|
The supplied size was smaller than required. |
|
A supplied object handle was invalid. |
|
The XrInstance was lost or could not be found. It will need to be destroyed and optionally recreated. |
|
The session is already running. |
|
The session is not yet running. |
|
The XrSession was lost. It will need to be destroyed and optionally recreated. |
|
The provided |
|
The provided |
|
The maximum number of supported semantic paths has been reached. |
|
The semantic path character format is invalid. |
|
The semantic path is unsupported. |
|
The layer was NULL or otherwise invalid. |
|
The number of specified layers is greater than the supported number. |
|
The image rect was negatively sized or otherwise invalid. |
|
The image format is not supported by the runtime or platform. |
|
The API used to retrieve an action’s state does not match the action’s type. |
|
The session is not in the ready state. |
|
The session is not in the stopping state. |
|
The provided |
|
The specified reference space is not supported by the runtime or system. |
|
The file could not be accessed. |
|
The file’s contents were invalid. |
|
The specified form factor is not supported by the current runtime or platform. |
|
The specified form factor is supported, but the device is currently not available, e.g. not plugged in or powered off. |
|
A requested API layer is not present or could not be loaded. |
|
The call was made without having made a previously required call. |
|
The given graphics device is not in a valid state. The graphics device could be lost or initialized without meeting graphics requirements. |
|
The supplied pose was invalid with respect to the requirements. |
|
The supplied index was outside the range of valid indices. |
|
The specified view configuration type is not supported by the runtime or platform. |
|
The specified environment blend mode is not supported by the runtime or platform. |
|
The name provided was a duplicate of an already-existing resource. |
|
The name provided was invalid. |
|
A referenced action set is not attached to the session. |
|
The session already has attached action sets. |
|
The localized name provided was a duplicate of an already-existing resource. |
|
The localized name provided was invalid. |
|
The |
|
The loader was unable to find or load a runtime. |
|
xrSetAndroidApplicationThreadKHR failed as thread id is invalid. (Added by the |
|
xrSetAndroidApplicationThreadKHR failed setting the thread attributes/priority. (Added by the |
2.10.1. Convenience Macros
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_SUCCEEDED(result) ((result) >= 0)
A convenience macro that can be used to test if a function succeeded.
This may be a qualified success such as XR_FRAME_DISCARDED
.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_FAILED(result) ((result) < 0)
A convenience macro that can be used to test if a function has failed in some way.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_UNQUALIFIED_SUCCESS(result) ((result) == 0)
A convenience macro that can be used to test a function’s failure.
The XR_UNQUALIFIED_SUCCESS macro is a convenience macro which may be
used to compare an XrResult to 0
(XR_SUCCESS
) exclusively.
2.10.2. Validation
Except as noted below or in individual API specifications, valid API usage may be required by the runtime. Runtimes may choose to validate some API usage and return an appropriate error code.
Application developers should use validation layers to catch and eliminate errors during development. Once validated, applications should not enable validation layers by default.
If a function returns a run time error, unless otherwise specified any output parameters will have undefined contents, except that if the output parameter is a structure with type and next fields, those fields will be unmodified. Any output structures chained from next will also have undefined contents, except that the type and next will be unmodified.
Unless otherwise specified, errors do not affect existing OpenXR objects. Objects that have already been successfully created may still be used by the application.
XrResult code returns may be added to a given function in future versions of the specification. Runtimes must return only XrResult codes from the set documented for the given application API version.
Runtimes must ensure that incorrect usage by an application does not affect the integrity of the operating system, the API implementation, or other API client applications in the system, and does not allow one application to access data belonging to another application.
2.11. Handles
Objects which are allocated by the runtime on behalf of applications are
represented by handles.
Handles are opaque identifiers for objects whose lifetime is controlled by
applications via the create and destroy functions.
Example handle types include XrInstance, XrSession, and
XrSwapchain.
Handles which have not been destroyed are unique for a given application
process, but may be reused after being destroyed.
Unless otherwise specified, a successful handle creation function call
returns a new unique handle.
Unless otherwise specified, handles are implicitly destroyed when their
parent handle is destroyed.
Applications may destroy handles explicitly before the parent handle is
destroyed, and should do so if no longer needed, in order to conserve
resources.
Runtimes may detect XR_NULL_HANDLE and other invalid handles passed
where a valid handle is required and return XR_ERROR_HANDLE_INVALID
.
However, runtimes are not required to do so unless otherwise specified, and
so use of any invalid handle may result in undefined behavior.
When a function has an optional handle parameter, XR_NULL_HANDLE must
be used unless passing a valid handle.
All functions that take a handle parameter may return
XR_ERROR_HANDLE_INVALID
.
Handles form a hierarchy in which child handles fall under the validity and lifetime of parent handles. For example, to create an XrSwapchain handle, applications must call xrCreateSwapchain and pass an XrSession handle. Thus XrSwapchain is a child handle to XrSession.
2.12. Object Handle Types
The type of an object handle used in a function is usually determined by the specification of that function, as discussed in Valid Usage for Object Handles. However, some functions accept or return object handle parameters where the type of the object handle is unknown at execution time and is not specified in the description of the function itself. For these functions, the XrObjectType may be used to explicitly specify the type of a handle.
For example, an information-gathering or debugging mechanism implemented in a runtime extension or API layer extension may return a list of object handles that are generated by the mechanism’s operation. The same mechanism may also return a parallel list of object handle types that allow the recipient of this information to easily determine the types of the handles.
In general, anywhere an object handle of more than one type can occur, the object handle type may be provided to indicate its type.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef enum XrObjectType {
XR_OBJECT_TYPE_UNKNOWN = 0,
XR_OBJECT_TYPE_INSTANCE = 1,
XR_OBJECT_TYPE_SESSION = 2,
XR_OBJECT_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN = 3,
XR_OBJECT_TYPE_SPACE = 4,
XR_OBJECT_TYPE_ACTION_SET = 5,
XR_OBJECT_TYPE_ACTION = 6,
XR_OBJECT_TYPE_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrObjectType;
The XrObjectType enumeration defines values, each of which corresponds to a specific OpenXR handle type. These values can be used to associate debug information with a particular type of object through one or more extensions.
The following table defines XrObjectType and OpenXR Handle relationships:
XrObjectType | OpenXR Handle Type |
---|---|
|
Unknown/Undefined Handle |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.13. Buffer Size Parameters
Functions with input/output buffer parameters take on either parameter form
or struct form, looking like one of the following examples, with the element
type being float
in this case:
Parameter form:
XrResult xrFunction(uint32_t elementCapacityInput, uint32_t* elementCountOutput, float* elements);
Struct form:
XrResult xrFunction(XrBuffer* buffer);
struct XrBuffer {
uint32_t elementCapacityInput;
uint32_t elementCountOutput;
float* elements;
};
A two-call idiom may be employed, first calling xrFunction
(with a
valid elementCountOutput
pointer if in parameter form), but passing
NULL
as elements
and 0
as elementCapacityInput
, to
retrieve the required buffer size as number of elements (number of floats in
this example).
After allocating a buffer at least as large as elementCountOutput
(in
a struct) or the value pointed to by elementCountOutput
(as
parameters), a pointer to the allocated buffer should be passed as
elements
, along with the buffer’s length in
elementCapacityInput
, to a second call to xrFunction
to perform
the retrieval of the data.
In case that elements
is a struct with type
and next
fields, the application must set the type
to the correct value as
well as next
either to NULL
or a struct with extension related
data in which type
and next
also need to be well defined.
In the following discussion, "set elementCountOutput
" should be
interpreted as "set the value pointed to by elementCountOutput
" in
parameter form and "set the value of elementCountOutput
" in struct
form.
These functions have the below-listed behavior with respect to the buffer
size parameters:
Some functions fill multiple buffers in one call.
For these functions, the elementCapacityInput
,
elementCountOutput
and elements
parameters or fields are
repeated, once per buffer, with different prefixes.
In that case, the semantics above still apply, with the additional behavior
that if any elementCapacityInput
parameter or field is set to 0 by the
application, the runtime must treat all elementCapacityInput
values
as if they were set to 0.
If any elementCapacityInput
value is too small to fit all elements of
the buffer, XR_ERROR_SIZE_INSUFFICIENT
must be returned, and the data
in all buffers is undefined.
2.14. Time
Time is represented by a 64-bit signed integer representing nanoseconds
(XrTime
).
The passage of time must be monotonic and not real-time (i.e. wall clock
time).
Thus the time is always increasing at a constant rate and is unaffected by
clock changes, time zones, daylight savings, etc.
2.14.1. XrTime
typedef int64_t XrTime;
XrTime
is a base value type that represents time as a signed 64-bit
integer, representing the monotonically-increasing count of nanoseconds that
have elapsed since a runtime-chosen epoch.
XrTime
always represents the time elapsed since that constant
epoch, rather than a duration or a time point relative to some moving epoch
such as vsync time, etc.
Durations are instead represented by XrDuration
.
A single runtime must use the same epoch for all simultaneous applications. Time must be represented the same regardless of multiple processors or threads present in the system.
The period precision of time reported by the runtime is runtime-dependent, and may change. One nanosecond is the finest possible period precision. A runtime may, for example, report time progression with only microsecond-level granularity.
Time must not be assumed to correspond to a system clock time.
Unless specified otherwise, zero or a negative value is not a valid
XrTime
, and related functions must return error
XR_ERROR_TIME_INVALID
.
Applications must not initialize such XrTime
fields to a zero
value.
Instead, applications should always assign XrTime
fields to the
meaningful point in time they are choosing to reason about, such as a
frame’s predicted display time, or an action’s last change time.
The behavior of a runtime is undefined when time overflows beyond the
maximum positive value that can be represented by an XrTime
.
Runtimes should choose an epoch that minimizes the chance of overflow.
Runtimes should also choose an epoch that minimizes the chance of underflow
below 0 for applications performing a reasonable amount of historical pose
lookback.
For example, if the runtime chooses an epoch relative to its startup time,
it should push the epoch into the past by enough time to avoid applications
performing reasonable pose lookback from reaching a negative XrTime
value.
An application cannot assume that the system’s clock and the runtime’s clock
will maintain a constant relationship across frames and should avoid
storing such an offset, as this may cause time drift.
Applications should instead always use time interop functions to convert a
relevant time point across the system’s clock and the runtime’s clock using
extensions, for example,
XR_KHR_win32_convert_performance_counter_time
or
XR_KHR_convert_timespec_time
.
2.15. Duration
Duration refers to an elapsed period of time, as opposed to an absolute timepoint.
2.15.1. XrDuration
typedef int64_t XrDuration;
The difference between two timepoints is a duration, and thus the difference
between two XrTime
values is an XrDuration
value.
Functions that refer to durations use XrDuration
as opposed to
XrTime
.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_NO_DURATION 0
For the case of timeout durations, XR_NO_DURATION may be used to indicate that the timeout is immediate.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_INFINITE_DURATION 0x7fffffffffffffffLL
XR_INFINITE_DURATION is a special value that may be used to indicate that the timeout never occurs. A timeout with a duration that refers to the past has the same effect as a timeout of XR_NO_DURATION.
2.16. Prediction Time Limits
Some functions involve prediction.
For example, xrLocateViews accepts a display time for which to return
the resulting data.
Prediction times provided by applications may refer to time in the past or
the future.
Times in the past may be interpolated historical data.
Runtimes have different practical limits with respect to how far forward or
backward prediction times can be accurate.
There is no prescribed forward limit the application can successfully
request predictions for, though predictions may become less accurate as they
get farther into the future.
With respect to backward prediction, the application can pass a prediction
time equivalent to the timestamp of the most recently received pose plus as
much as 50
milliseconds in the past to retrieve accurate historical
data.
Requested times predating this time window, or requested times predating the
earliest received pose, may result in a best effort data whose accuracy
reduced or unspecified.
2.17. Colors
The XrColor4f structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrColor4f {
float r;
float g;
float b;
float a;
} XrColor4f;
Unless otherwise specified, colors are encoded as linear (not with sRGB nor other gamma compression) values with individual components being in the range of 0.0 through 1.0, and without the RGB components being premultiplied by the alpha component.
If color encoding is specified as being premultiplied by the alpha component, the RGB components are set to zero if the alpha component is zero.
2.18. Coordinate System
This API uses a Cartesian right-handed coordinate system.
The conventions for mapping coordinate axes of any particular space to meaningful directions depend on and are documented with the description of the space.
The API uses 2D, 3D, and 4D floating-point vectors to describe points and directions in a space.
A two-dimensional vector is defined by the XrVector2f structure:
typedef struct XrVector2f {
float x;
float y;
} XrVector2f;
If used to represent physical distances (rather than e.g. normalized direction) and not otherwise specified, values must be in meters.
A three-dimensional vector is defined by the XrVector3f structure:
typedef struct XrVector3f {
float x;
float y;
float z;
} XrVector3f;
If used to represent physical distances (rather than e.g. velocity or angular velocity) and not otherwise specified, values must be in meters.
A four-dimensional or homogeneous vector is defined by the XrVector4f structure:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrVector4f {
float x;
float y;
float z;
float w;
} XrVector4f;
If used to represent physical distances, x
, y
, and z
values must be in meters.
Rotation is represented by a unit quaternion defined by the XrQuaternionf structure:
typedef struct XrQuaternionf {
float x;
float y;
float z;
float w;
} XrQuaternionf;
A pose is defined by the XrPosef structure:
typedef struct XrPosef {
XrQuaternionf orientation;
XrVector3f position;
} XrPosef;
A construct representing a position and orientation within a space, with
position expressed in meters, and orientation represented as a unit
quaternion.
When using XrPosef the rotation described by orientation
is
always applied before the translation described by position
.
A runtime must return XR_ERROR_POSE_INVALID
if the orientation
norm deviates by more than 1% from unit length.
2.19. Common Object Types
Some types of OpenXR objects are used in multiple structures.
Those include the XrVector*f
and types specified above but also the
following structures: offset, extents and rectangle.
Offsets are used to describe the magnitude of an offset in two dimensions.
A floating-point offset is defined by the structure:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrOffset2Df {
float x;
float y;
} XrOffset2Df;
This structure is used for component values that may be fractional (floating-point). If used to represent physical distances, values must be in meters.
An integer offset is defined by the structure:
typedef struct XrOffset2Di {
int32_t x;
int32_t y;
} XrOffset2Di;
This variant is for representing discrete values such as texels. For representing physical distances, the floating-point variant must be used instead.
Extents are used to describe the size of a rectangular region in two dimensions.
A two-dimensional floating-point extent is defined by the structure:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrExtent2Df {
float width;
float height;
} XrExtent2Df;
This structure is used for component values that may be fractional (floating-point). If used to represent physical distances, values must be in meters.
The width
and height
value must be non-negative.
A two-dimensional integer extent is defined by the structure:
typedef struct XrExtent2Di {
int32_t width;
int32_t height;
} XrExtent2Di;
This variant is for representing discrete values such as texels. For representing physical distances, the floating-point variant must be used instead.
The width
and height
value must be non-negative.
Rectangles are used to describe a specific rectangular region in two dimensions. Rectangles must include both an offset and an extent defined in the same units. For instance, if a rectangle is in meters, both offset and extent must be in meters.
A rectangle with floating-point values is defined by the structure:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrRect2Df {
XrOffset2Df offset;
XrExtent2Df extent;
} XrRect2Df;
This structure is used for component values that may be fractional (floating-point).
The offset
is the position of the rectangle corner with minimum value
coordinates.
The other three corners are computed by adding the
XrExtent2Di::width
to the x
offset,
XrExtent2Di::height
to the y
offset, or both.
A rectangle with integer values is defined by the structure:
typedef struct XrRect2Di {
XrOffset2Di offset;
XrExtent2Di extent;
} XrRect2Di;
This variant is for representing discrete values such as texels. For representing physical distances, the floating-point variant must be used instead.
The offset
is the position of the rectangle corner with minimum value
coordinates.
The other three corners are computed by adding the
XrExtent2Di::width
to the x
offset,
XrExtent2Di::height
to the y
offset, or both.
2.20. Angles
Where a value is provided as a function parameter or as a structure member and will be interpreted as an angle, the value is defined to be in radians.
Field of view (FoV) is defined by the structure:
typedef struct XrFovf {
float angleLeft;
float angleRight;
float angleUp;
float angleDown;
} XrFovf;
Angles to the right of the center and upwards from the center are positive,
and angles to the left of the center and down from the center are negative.
The total horizontal field of view is angleRight
minus
angleLeft
, and the total vertical field of view is angleUp
minus
angleDown
.
For a symmetric FoV, angleRight
and angleUp
will have positive
values, angleLeft
will be -angleRight
, and angleDown
will
be -angleUp
.
The angles must be specified in radians, and must be between -π/2 and π/2 exclusively.
When angleLeft
> angleRight
, the content of the view must be
flipped horizontally.
When angleDown
> angleUp
, the content of the view must be
flipped vertically.
2.21. Boolean Values
typedef uint32_t XrBool32;
Boolean values used by OpenXR are of type XrBool32
and are 32-bits
wide as suggested by the name.
The only valid values are the following:
#define XR_TRUE 1
#define XR_FALSE 0
2.22. Events
Events are messages sent from the runtime to the application.
2.22.1. Event Polling
These events are placed in a queue and the application must read from the queue with regularity. Events are read from the queue one at a time via xrPollEvent. Every event is identified by an individual struct, with each struct beginning with an XrEventDataBaseHeader.
XrInstance instance; // previously initialized
// Initialize an event buffer to hold the output.
XrEventDataBuffer event = {XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_BUFFER};
XrResult result = xrPollEvent(instance, &event);
if (result == XR_SUCCESS) {
switch (event.type) {
case XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_SESSION_STATE_CHANGED: {
const XrEventDataSessionStateChanged& session_state_changed_event =
*reinterpret_cast<XrEventDataSessionStateChanged*>(&event);
// ...
break;
}
case XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_INSTANCE_LOSS_PENDING: {
const XrEventDataInstanceLossPending& instance_loss_pending_event =
*reinterpret_cast<XrEventDataInstanceLossPending*>(&event);
// ...
break;
}
}
}
xrPollEvent
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrPollEvent(
XrInstance instance,
XrEventDataBuffer* eventData);
xrPollEvent polls for the next event and returns an event if one is
available.
xrPollEvent returns immediately regardless of whether an event was
available.
The event (if present) is unilaterally removed from the queue if a valid
XrInstance is provided.
On return the eventData
parameter is filled with the event’s data and
the type field is changed to the event’s type.
Runtimes may create valid next chains depending on enabled extensions, but
they must guarantee that any such chains point only to objects which fit
completely within the original XrEventDataBuffer pointed to by
eventData
.
The runtime must discard queued events which contain destroyed or otherwise invalid handles.
Event | Description |
---|---|
event queue has overflowed and some events were lost |
|
application is about to lose the instance |
|
active input form factor for one or more top level user paths has changed |
|
runtime will begin operating with updated space bounds |
|
application has changed lifecycle state |
The XrEventDataBaseHeader structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrEventDataBaseHeader {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
} XrEventDataBaseHeader;
The XrEventDataBaseHeader is a generic structure used to identify the common event data elements.
Upon receipt, the XrEventDataBaseHeader pointer should be type-cast to
a pointer of the appropriate event data based on the type
parameter.
The XrEventDataBuffer is a structure passed to xrPollEvent large enough to contain any returned event data element. The maximum size is specified by XR_MAX_EVENT_DATA_SIZE.
It is sufficient to clear the type
and next
parameters of an
XrEventDataBuffer when passing it as an input to xrPollEvent.
An XrEventDataBuffer may be type-cast to an
XrEventDataBaseHeader pointer or a pointer to any other appropriate
event data based on the type
parameter.
typedef struct XrEventDataBuffer {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
uint8_t varying[4000];
} XrEventDataBuffer;
XR_MAX_EVENT_DATA_SIZE is the maximum size of an XrEventDataBuffer.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_MAX_EVENT_DATA_SIZE sizeof(XrEventDataBuffer)
XrEventDataEventsLost
The XrEventDataEventsLost structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrEventDataEventsLost {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
uint32_t lostEventCount;
} XrEventDataEventsLost;
Receiving the XrEventDataEventsLost event structure indicates that the event queue overflowed and some events were removed at the position within the queue at which this event was found.
Other event structures are defined in later chapters in the context where their definition is most relevant.
2.23. System resource lifetime
The creator of an underlying system resource is responsible for ensuring the resource’s lifetime matches the lifetime of the associated OpenXR handle.
Resources passed as inputs from the application to the runtime when creating
an OpenXR handle should not be freed while that handle is valid.
A runtime must not free resources passed as inputs or decrease their
reference counts (if applicable) from the initial value.
For example, the graphics device handle (or pointer) passed in to
xrCreateSession in XrGraphicsBinding*
structure should be kept
alive when the corresponding XrSession handle is valid, and should be
freed by the application after the XrSession handle is destroyed.
Resources created by the runtime should not be freed by the application, and
the application should maintain the same reference count (if applicable) at
the destruction of the OpenXR handle as it had at its creation.
For example, the ID3D*Texture2D
objects in the XrSwapchainImageD3D*
are
created by the runtime and associated with the lifetime of the
XrSwapchain handle.
The application should not keep additional reference counts on any
ID3D*Texture2D
objects past the lifetime of the XrSwapchain handle,
or make extra reference count decrease after destroying the
XrSwapchain handle.
3. API Initialization
Before using an OpenXR runtime, an application must initialize it by creating an XrInstance object. The following functions are useful for gathering information about the API layers and extensions installed on the system and creating the instance.
xrEnumerateApiLayerProperties and xrEnumerateInstanceExtensionProperties can be called before calling xrCreateInstance.
3.1. Exported Functions
A dynamically linked library (.dll or .so) that implements the API loader must export all core OpenXR API functions. However, the application can gain access to extension functions by obtaining pointers to these functions through the use of xrGetInstanceProcAddr.
3.2. Function Pointers
Function pointers for all OpenXR functions can be obtained with the function xrGetInstanceProcAddr.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetInstanceProcAddr(
XrInstance instance,
const char* name,
PFN_xrVoidFunction* function);
xrGetInstanceProcAddr itself is obtained in a platform- and loader- specific manner. Typically, the loader library will export this function as a function symbol, so applications can link against the loader library, or load it dynamically and look up the symbol using platform-specific APIs. Loaders must export function symbols for all core OpenXR functions. Because of this, applications that use only the core OpenXR functions have no need to use xrGetInstanceProcAddr.
Because an application can call xrGetInstanceProcAddr before creating
an instance, xrGetInstanceProcAddr returns a valid function pointer
when the instance
parameter is XR_NULL_HANDLE and the name
parameter is one of the following strings:
xrGetInstanceProcAddr must return XR_ERROR_HANDLE_INVALID
if
name
is not one of the above strings and instance
is
XR_NULL_HANDLE.
xrGetInstanceProcAddr may return XR_ERROR_HANDLE_INVALID
if
name
is not one of the above strings and instance
is invalid but
not XR_NULL_HANDLE.
xrGetInstanceProcAddr must return XR_ERROR_FUNCTION_UNSUPPORTED
if instance
is a valid instance and the string specified in name
is not the name of an OpenXR core or enabled extension function.
If name
is the name of an extension function, then the result returned
by xrGetInstanceProcAddr will depend upon how the instance
was
created.
If instance
was created with the related extension’s name appearing in
the XrInstanceCreateInfo::enabledExtensionNames
array, then
xrGetInstanceProcAddr returns a valid function pointer.
If the related extension’s name did not appear in the
XrInstanceCreateInfo::enabledExtensionNames
array during the
creation of instance
, then xrGetInstanceProcAddr returns
XR_ERROR_FUNCTION_UNSUPPORTED
.
Because of this, function pointers returned by xrGetInstanceProcAddr
using one XrInstance may not be valid when used with objects related
to a different XrInstance.
The returned function pointer is of type PFN_xrVoidFunction, and must be cast to the type of the function being queried.
The table below defines the various use cases for xrGetInstanceProcAddr and return value (“fp” is “function pointer”) for each case.
instance parameter |
name parameter |
return value |
---|---|---|
* |
|
undefined |
invalid instance |
* |
undefined |
|
fp |
|
|
fp |
|
|
fp |
|
|
* (any |
|
instance |
core OpenXR function |
fp1 |
instance |
enabled extension function for |
fp1 |
instance |
* (any |
|
- 1
-
The returned function pointer must only be called with a handle (the first parameter) that is
instance
or a child ofinstance
.
typedef void (XRAPI_PTR *PFN_xrVoidFunction)(void);
PFN_xrVoidFunction is a generic function pointer type returned by queries, specifically those to xrGetInstanceProcAddr.
typedef XrResult (XRAPI_PTR *PFN_xrGetInstanceProcAddr)(XrInstance instance, const char* name, PFN_xrVoidFunction* function);
PFN_xrGetInstanceProcAddr is a function pointer type for xrGetInstanceProcAddr.
typedef struct XrApiLayerCreateInfo XrApiLayerCreateInfo;
typedef XrResult (XRAPI_PTR *PFN_xrCreateApiLayerInstance)(
const XrInstanceCreateInfo* info,
const XrApiLayerCreateInfo* apiLayerInfo,
XrInstance* instance);
PFN_xrCreateApiLayerInstance is a function pointer type for xrCreateApiLayerInstance.
Note: This function pointer type is only used by an OpenXR loader library, and never by an application.
3.3. Runtime Interface Negotiation
In order to negotiate the runtime interface version with the loader, the runtime must implement the xrNegotiateLoaderRuntimeInterface function.
Note
The API described in this section is solely intended for use between an OpenXR loader and a runtime (and/or an API layer, where noted). Applications use the appropriate loader library for their platform to load the active runtime and configured API layers, rather than making these calls directly. This section is included in the specification to ensure consistency between runtimes in their interactions with the loader. Be advised that as this is not application-facing API, some of the typical OpenXR API conventions are not followed in this section. |
The xrNegotiateLoaderRuntimeInterface function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrNegotiateLoaderRuntimeInterface(
const XrNegotiateLoaderInfo* loaderInfo,
XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest* runtimeRequest);
xrNegotiateLoaderRuntimeInterface should be directly exported by a
runtime so that using e.g. GetProcAddress
on Windows or dlsym
on POSIX
platforms returns a valid function pointer to it.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_INITIALIZATION_FAILED
if any of the
following conditions on loaderInfo
are true:
-
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
structType
is notXR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_LOADER_INFO
-
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
structVersion
is not XR_LOADER_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION -
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
structSize
is notsizeof(XrNegotiateLoaderInfo)
The runtime must also return XR_ERROR_INITIALIZATION_FAILED
if any of
the following conditions on runtimeRequest
are true:
-
XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest::
structType
is notXR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_RUNTIME_REQUEST
-
XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest::
structVersion
is not XR_RUNTIME_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION -
XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest::
structSize
is notsizeof(XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest)
The runtime must determine if it supports the loader’s request. The runtime does not support the loader’s request if either of the following is true:
-
the runtime does not support the interface versions supported by the loader as specified by the parameters XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
minInterfaceVersion
and XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::maxInterfaceVersion
-
the runtime does not support the API versions supported by the loader as specified by the parameters XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
minApiVersion
and XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::maxApiVersion
.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_INITIALIZATION_FAILED
if it does not
support the loader’s request.
The runtime must set the
XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest::runtimeInterfaceVersion
with the
runtime interface version it desires to support.
The XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest::runtimeInterfaceVersion
set must
be between XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::minInterfaceVersion
and
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::maxInterfaceVersion
.
The runtime must set the
XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest::runtimeApiVersion
with the API
version of OpenXR it will execute under.
The XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest::runtimeApiVersion
set must be
between XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::minApiVersion
and
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::maxApiVersion
.
The runtime must set the
XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest::getInstanceProcAddr
with a valid
function pointer for the loader to use to query function pointers to the
remaining OpenXR functions supported by the runtime.
If the function succeeds, the runtime must return XR_SUCCESS
.
The XrNegotiateLoaderInfo structure is used to pass information about the loader to a runtime or an API layer.
The XrNegotiateLoaderInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrNegotiateLoaderInfo {
XrLoaderInterfaceStructs structType;
uint32_t structVersion;
size_t structSize;
uint32_t minInterfaceVersion;
uint32_t maxInterfaceVersion;
XrVersion minApiVersion;
XrVersion maxApiVersion;
} XrNegotiateLoaderInfo;
This structure is an input from the loader to the runtime in an xrNegotiateLoaderRuntimeInterface call, as well as from the loader to an API layer in an xrNegotiateLoaderApiLayerInterface call.
The XrLoaderInterfaceStructs enumeration is defined as:
typedef enum XrLoaderInterfaceStructs {
XR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_UNINTIALIZED = 0,
XR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_LOADER_INFO = 1,
XR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_API_LAYER_REQUEST = 2,
XR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_RUNTIME_REQUEST = 3,
XR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_API_LAYER_CREATE_INFO = 4,
XR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_API_LAYER_NEXT_INFO = 5,
XR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCTS_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrLoaderInterfaceStructs;
This enumeration serves a similar purpose in the runtime and API layer interface negotiation (loader) API as XrStructureType serves in the application-facing API.
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_LOADER_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION 1
XR_LOADER_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION is the current version of the
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo structure.
It is used to populate the XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::structVersion
field.
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_CURRENT_LOADER_RUNTIME_VERSION 1
XR_CURRENT_LOADER_RUNTIME_VERSION is the current version of the overall OpenXR Loader Runtime interface. It is used to populate maximum and minimum interface version fields in XrNegotiateLoaderInfo when loading a runtime.
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_CURRENT_LOADER_API_LAYER_VERSION 1
XR_CURRENT_LOADER_API_LAYER_VERSION is the current version of the overall OpenXR Loader API Layer interface. It is used to populate maximum and minimum interface version fields in XrNegotiateLoaderInfo when loading an API layer.
The XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest structure is used to pass information about the runtime back to the loader.
The XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest {
XrLoaderInterfaceStructs structType;
uint32_t structVersion;
size_t structSize;
uint32_t runtimeInterfaceVersion;
XrVersion runtimeApiVersion;
PFN_xrGetInstanceProcAddr getInstanceProcAddr;
} XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest;
This is an output structure from runtime negotiation.
The loader must populate structType
, structVersion
, and
structSize
to ensure correct interpretation by the runtime, while the
runtime populates the rest of the fields in a successful call to
xrNegotiateLoaderRuntimeInterface.
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_RUNTIME_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION 1
XR_RUNTIME_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION is the current version of the
XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest structure.
It is used to populate the
XrNegotiateRuntimeRequest::structVersion
field.
3.4. API Layer Interface Negotiation
In order to negotiate the API layer interface version with the loader, an OpenXR API layer must implement the xrNegotiateLoaderApiLayerInterface function.
Note
The API described in this section is solely intended for use between an OpenXR loader and an API layer. Applications use the appropriate loader library for their platform to load the active runtime and configured API layers, rather than making these calls directly. This section is included in the specification to ensure consistency between runtimes in their interactions with the loader. Be advised that as this is not application-facing API, some of the typical OpenXR API conventions are not followed in this section. |
The xrNegotiateLoaderApiLayerInterface function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrNegotiateLoaderApiLayerInterface(
const XrNegotiateLoaderInfo* loaderInfo,
const char* layerName,
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest* apiLayerRequest);
xrNegotiateLoaderApiLayerInterface should be directly exported by an
API layer so that using e.g. GetProcAddress
on Windows or dlsym
on POSIX
platforms returns a valid function pointer to it.
The API layer must return XR_ERROR_INITIALIZATION_FAILED
if any of
the following conditions on loaderInfo
are true:
-
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
structType
is notXR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_LOADER_INFO
-
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
structVersion
is not XR_LOADER_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION -
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
structSize
is notsizeof(XrNegotiateLoaderInfo)
The API layer must also return XR_ERROR_INITIALIZATION_FAILED
if any
of the following conditions on apiLayerRequest
are true:
-
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::
structType
is notXR_LOADER_INTERFACE_STRUCT_API_LAYER_REQUEST
-
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::
structVersion
is not XR_API_LAYER_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION -
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::
structSize
is notsizeof(XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest)
The API layer must determine if it supports the loader’s request. The API layer does not support the loader’s request if either of the following is true:
-
the API layer does not support the interface versions supported by the loader as specified by the parameters XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
minInterfaceVersion
and XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::maxInterfaceVersion
-
the API layer does not support the API versions supported by the loader as specified by the parameters XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::
minApiVersion
and XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::maxApiVersion
.
The API layer must return XR_ERROR_INITIALIZATION_FAILED
if it does
not support the loader’s request.
The API layer must set the
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::layerInterfaceVersion
with the API
layer interface version it desires to support.
The XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::layerInterfaceVersion
set must
be between XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::minInterfaceVersion
and
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::maxInterfaceVersion
.
The API layer must set the
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::layerApiVersion
with the API version
of OpenXR it will execute under.
The XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::layerApiVersion
set must be
between XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::minApiVersion
and
XrNegotiateLoaderInfo::maxApiVersion
.
The API layer must set the
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::getInstanceProcAddr
with a valid
function pointer for the loader to use to query function pointers to the
remaining OpenXR functions supported by the API layer.
The API layer must set the
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::createApiLayerInstance
with a valid
function pointer to an implementation of xrCreateApiLayerInstance for
the loader to use to create the instance through the API layer call chain.
If the function succeeds, the API layer must return XR_SUCCESS
.
The API layer must not call into another API layer from its implementation of the xrNegotiateLoaderApiLayerInterface function. The loader must handle all API layer negotiations with each API layer individually.
The XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest structure is used to pass information about the API layer back to the loader.
The XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest {
XrLoaderInterfaceStructs structType;
uint32_t structVersion;
size_t structSize;
uint32_t layerInterfaceVersion;
XrVersion layerApiVersion;
PFN_xrGetInstanceProcAddr getInstanceProcAddr;
PFN_xrCreateApiLayerInstance createApiLayerInstance;
} XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest;
This is an output structure from API layer negotiation.
The loader must populate structType
, structVersion
, and
structSize
before calling to ensure correct interpretation by the API
layer, while the API layer populates the rest of the fields in a successful
call to xrNegotiateLoaderApiLayerInterface.
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_API_LAYER_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION 1
XR_API_LAYER_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION is the current version of the
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest structure.
It is used to populate the
XrNegotiateApiLayerRequest::structVersion
field.
The xrCreateApiLayerInstance function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrCreateApiLayerInstance(
const XrInstanceCreateInfo* info,
const XrApiLayerCreateInfo* layerInfo,
XrInstance* instance);
An API layer’s implementation of the xrCreateApiLayerInstance function is invoked during the loader’s implementation of xrCreateInstance, if the layer in question is enabled.
An API layer needs additional information during xrCreateInstance calls, so each API layer must implement the xrCreateApiLayerInstance function, which is a special API layer function.
An API layer must not implement xrCreateInstance.
xrCreateApiLayerInstance must be called by the loader during its implementation of the xrCreateInstance function.
The loader must call the first API layer’s xrCreateApiLayerInstance function passing in the pointer to the created XrApiLayerCreateInfo.
The XrApiLayerCreateInfo::nextInfo
must be a linked-list of
XrApiLayerNextInfo structures with information about each of the API
layers that are to be enabled.
Note that this does not operate like a next
chain in the OpenXR
application API, but instead describes the enabled API layers from outermost
to innermost.
The API layer may validate that it is getting the correct next information
by checking that the XrApiLayerNextInfo::layerName
matches the
expected value.
The API layer must use the information in its XrApiLayerNextInfo to call down the call chain to the next xrCreateApiLayerInstance:
-
The API layer must copy the XrApiLayerCreateInfo structure into its own structure.
-
The API layer must then update its copy of the XrApiLayerCreateInfo structure, setting XrApiLayerCreateInfo::XrApiLayerCreateInfo::
nextInfo
to point to the XrApiLayerNextInfo for the next API layer (e.g.layerInfoCopy→nextInfo = layerInfo→nextInfo→next;
). -
The API layer must then use the pointer to its XrApiLayerCreateInfo structure (instead of the one that was passed in) when it makes a call to the xrCreateApiLayerInstance function.
-
If the nested xrCreateApiLayerInstance call succeeds, the API layer may choose to setup its own dispatch table to the next API layer’s functions using the returned XrInstance and the next API layer’s xrGetInstanceProcAddr.
-
The API layer must return the XrResult returned from the next API layer.
The XrApiLayerCreateInfo structure contains special information required by a API layer during its create instance process.
The XrApiLayerCreateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrApiLayerCreateInfo {
XrLoaderInterfaceStructs structType;
uint32_t structVersion;
size_t structSize;
void* loaderInstance;
char settings_file_location[XR_API_LAYER_MAX_SETTINGS_PATH_SIZE];
XrApiLayerNextInfo* nextInfo;
} XrApiLayerCreateInfo;
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_API_LAYER_CREATE_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION 1
XR_API_LAYER_CREATE_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION is the current version of the
XrApiLayerCreateInfo structure.
It is used to populate the XrApiLayerCreateInfo::structVersion
field.
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_API_LAYER_MAX_SETTINGS_PATH_SIZE 512
XR_API_LAYER_MAX_SETTINGS_PATH_SIZE is the size of the
XrApiLayerCreateInfo::settings_file_location
field.
The XrApiLayerNextInfo structure:
The XrApiLayerNextInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrApiLayerNextInfo {
XrLoaderInterfaceStructs structType;
uint32_t structVersion;
size_t structSize;
char layerName[XR_MAX_API_LAYER_NAME_SIZE];
PFN_xrGetInstanceProcAddr nextGetInstanceProcAddr;
PFN_xrCreateApiLayerInstance nextCreateApiLayerInstance;
struct XrApiLayerNextInfo* next;
} XrApiLayerNextInfo;
// Provided by XR_LOADER_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_API_LAYER_NEXT_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION 1
XR_API_LAYER_NEXT_INFO_STRUCT_VERSION is the current version of the
XrApiLayerNextInfo structure.
It is used to populate the XrApiLayerNextInfo::structVersion
field.
4. Instance
XR_DEFINE_HANDLE(XrInstance)
An OpenXR instance is an object that allows an OpenXR application to communicate with an OpenXR runtime. The application accomplishes this communication by calling xrCreateInstance and receiving a handle to the resulting XrInstance object.
The XrInstance object stores and tracks OpenXR-related application state, without storing any such state in the application’s global address space. This allows the application to create multiple instances as well as safely encapsulate the application’s OpenXR state since this object is opaque to the application. OpenXR runtimes may limit the number of simultaneous XrInstance objects that may be created and used, but they must support the creation and usage of at least one XrInstance object per process.
Physically, this state may be stored in any of the OpenXR loader, OpenXR API layers or the OpenXR runtime components. The exact storage and distribution of this saved state is implementation-dependent, except where indicated by this specification.
The tracking of OpenXR state in the instance allows the streamlining of the API, where the intended instance is inferred from the highest ascendant of an OpenXR function’s target object. For example, in:
myResult = xrEndFrame(mySession, &myEndFrameDescription);
the XrSession object was created from an XrInstance object. The OpenXR loader typically keeps track of the XrInstance that is the parent of the XrSession object in this example and directs the function to the runtime associated with that instance. This tracking of OpenXR objects eliminates the need to specify an XrInstance in every OpenXR function.
4.1. API Layers and Extensions
Additional functionality may be provided by API layers or extensions. An API layer must not add or modify the definition of OpenXR functions, while an extension may do so.
The set of API layers to enable is specified when creating an instance, and those API layers are able to intercept any functions dispatched to that instance or any of its child objects.
Example API layers may include (but are not limited to):
-
an API layer to dump out OpenXR API calls
-
an API layer to perform OpenXR validation
To determine what set of API layers are available, OpenXR provides the xrEnumerateApiLayerProperties function:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEnumerateApiLayerProperties(
uint32_t propertyCapacityInput,
uint32_t* propertyCountOutput,
XrApiLayerProperties* properties);
The list of available layers may change at any time due to actions outside
of the OpenXR runtime, so two calls to xrEnumerateApiLayerProperties
with the same parameters may return different results, or retrieve
different propertyCountOutput
values or properties
contents.
Once an instance has been created, the layers enabled for that instance will continue to be enabled and valid for the lifetime of that instance, even if some of them become unavailable for future instances.
The XrApiLayerProperties structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrApiLayerProperties {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
char layerName[XR_MAX_API_LAYER_NAME_SIZE];
XrVersion specVersion;
uint32_t layerVersion;
char description[XR_MAX_API_LAYER_DESCRIPTION_SIZE];
} XrApiLayerProperties;
To enable a layer, the name of the layer should be added to
XrInstanceCreateInfo::enabledApiLayerNames
when creating an
XrInstance.
Loader implementations may provide mechanisms outside this API for enabling
specific API layers.
API layers enabled through such a mechanism are implicitly enabled, while
API layers enabled by including the API layer name in
XrInstanceCreateInfo::enabledApiLayerNames
are explicitly
enabled.
Except where otherwise specified, implicitly enabled and explicitly enabled
API layers differ only in the way they are enabled.
Explicitly enabling an API layer that is implicitly enabled has no
additional effect.
Instance extensions are able to affect the operation of the instance and any of its child objects. As stated earlier, extensions can expand the OpenXR API and provide new functions or augment behavior.
Examples of extensions may be (but are not limited to):
The application can determine the available instance extensions by calling xrEnumerateInstanceExtensionProperties:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEnumerateInstanceExtensionProperties(
const char* layerName,
uint32_t propertyCapacityInput,
uint32_t* propertyCountOutput,
XrExtensionProperties* properties);
Because the list of available layers may change externally between calls to
xrEnumerateInstanceExtensionProperties, two calls may retrieve
different results if a layerName
is available in one call but not in
another.
The extensions supported by a layer may also change between two calls, e.g.
if the layer implementation is replaced by a different version between those
calls.
The XrExtensionProperties structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrExtensionProperties {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
char extensionName[XR_MAX_EXTENSION_NAME_SIZE];
uint32_t extensionVersion;
} XrExtensionProperties;
4.2. Instance Lifecycle
The xrCreateInstance function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrCreateInstance(
const XrInstanceCreateInfo* createInfo,
XrInstance* instance);
xrCreateInstance creates the XrInstance, then enables and
initializes global API layers and extensions requested by the application.
If an extension is provided by an API layer, both the API layer and
extension must be specified at xrCreateInstance time.
If a specified API layer cannot be found, no XrInstance will be
created and the function will return XR_ERROR_API_LAYER_NOT_PRESENT
.
Likewise, if a specified extension cannot be found, the call must return
XR_ERROR_EXTENSION_NOT_PRESENT
and no XrInstance will be
created.
Additionally, some runtimes may limit the number of concurrent instances
that may be in use.
If the application attempts to create more instances than a runtime can
simultaneously support, xrCreateInstance may return
XR_ERROR_LIMIT_REACHED
.
If the XrApplicationInfo::applicationName
is the empty string
the runtime must return XR_ERROR_NAME_INVALID
.
If the XrInstanceCreateInfo structure contains a platform-specific
extension for a platform other than the target platform,
XR_ERROR_INITIALIZATION_FAILED
may be returned.
If a mandatory platform-specific extension is defined for the target
platform but no matching extension struct is provided in
XrInstanceCreateInfo the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_INITIALIZATION_FAILED
.
The XrInstanceCreateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrInstanceCreateInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrInstanceCreateFlags createFlags;
XrApplicationInfo applicationInfo;
uint32_t enabledApiLayerCount;
const char* const* enabledApiLayerNames;
uint32_t enabledExtensionCount;
const char* const* enabledExtensionNames;
} XrInstanceCreateInfo;
The XrInstanceCreateInfo::createFlags
member is of the following
type, and contains a bitwise-OR of zero or more of the bits defined in
XrInstanceCreateFlagBits.
typedef XrFlags64 XrInstanceCreateFlags;
Valid bits for XrInstanceCreateFlags are defined by XrInstanceCreateFlagBits.
// Flag bits for XrInstanceCreateFlags
There are currently no instance creation flag bits defined. This is reserved for future use.
The XrApplicationInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrApplicationInfo {
char applicationName[XR_MAX_APPLICATION_NAME_SIZE];
uint32_t applicationVersion;
char engineName[XR_MAX_ENGINE_NAME_SIZE];
uint32_t engineVersion;
XrVersion apiVersion;
} XrApplicationInfo;
Note
When using the OpenXR API to implement a reusable engine that will be used
by many applications, When using the OpenXR API to implement an individual application without a
shared engine, the input |
The xrDestroyInstance function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrDestroyInstance(
XrInstance instance);
The xrDestroyInstance function is used to destroy an XrInstance.
XrInstance handles are destroyed using xrDestroyInstance. When an XrInstance is destroyed, all handles that are children of that XrInstance are also destroyed.
4.3. Instance Information
The xrGetInstanceProperties function provides information about the instance and the associated runtime.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetInstanceProperties(
XrInstance instance,
XrInstanceProperties* instanceProperties);
The instanceProperties
parameter must be filled out by the runtime in
response to this call, with information as defined in
XrInstanceProperties.
The XrInstanceProperties structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrInstanceProperties {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrVersion runtimeVersion;
char runtimeName[XR_MAX_RUNTIME_NAME_SIZE];
} XrInstanceProperties;
4.4. Platform-Specific Instance Creation
Some amount of data required for instance creation is exposed through chained structures defined in extensions. These structures may be optional or even required for instance creation on specific platforms, but not on other platforms. Separating off platform-specific functionality into extension structures prevents the primary XrInstanceCreateInfo structure from becoming too bloated with unnecessary information.
See the
List of Extensions
appendix for the list of available extensions and their related structures.
These structures expand the XrInstanceCreateInfo parent struct using
the XrInstanceCreateInfo::next
member.
The specific list of structures that may be used for extending
XrInstanceCreateInfo::next
can be found in the "Valid Usage
(Implicit)" block immediately following the definition of the structure.
4.4.1. The Instance Lost Error
The XR_ERROR_INSTANCE_LOST
error indicates that the XrInstance
has become unusable.
This can happen if a critical runtime process aborts, if the connection to
the runtime is otherwise no longer available, or if the runtime encounters
an error during any function execution which prevents it from being able to
support further function execution.
Once XR_ERROR_INSTANCE_LOST
is first returned, it must henceforth be
returned by all non-destroy functions that involve an XrInstance or
child handle type until the instance is destroyed.
Applications must destroy the XrInstance.
Applications may then attempt to continue by recreating all relevant OpenXR
objects, starting with a new XrInstance.
A runtime may generate an XrEventDataInstanceLossPending event when
instance loss is detected.
4.4.2. XrEventDataInstanceLossPending
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrEventDataInstanceLossPending {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrTime lossTime;
} XrEventDataInstanceLossPending;
Receiving the XrEventDataInstanceLossPending event structure indicates
that the application is about to lose the indicated XrInstance at the
indicated lossTime
in the future.
The application should call xrDestroyInstance and relinquish any
instance-specific resources.
This typically occurs to make way for a replacement of the underlying
runtime, such as via a software update.
After the application has destroyed all of its instances and their children
and waited past the specified time, it may then re-try
xrCreateInstance in a loop waiting for whatever maintenance the
runtime is performing to complete.
The runtime will return XR_ERROR_RUNTIME_UNAVAILABLE
from
xrCreateInstance as long as it is unable to create the instance.
Once the runtime has returned and is able to continue, it must resume
returning XR_SUCCESS
from xrCreateInstance if valid data is
passed in.
4.5. Instance Enumerated Type String Functions
Applications often want to turn certain enum values from the runtime into strings for use in log messages, to be localized in UI, or for various other reasons. OpenXR provides functions that turn common enum types into UTF-8 strings for use in applications.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrResultToString(
XrInstance instance,
XrResult value,
char buffer[XR_MAX_RESULT_STRING_SIZE]);
Returns the text version of the provided XrResult value as a UTF-8 string.
In all cases the returned string must be one of:
The xrStructureTypeToString function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrStructureTypeToString(
XrInstance instance,
XrStructureType value,
char buffer[XR_MAX_STRUCTURE_NAME_SIZE]);
Returns the text version of the provided XrStructureType value as a UTF-8 string.
In all cases the returned string must be one of:
5. System
This API separates the concept of physical systems of XR devices from the
logical objects that applications interact with directly.
A system represents a collection of related devices in the runtime, often
made up of several individual hardware components working together to enable
XR experiences.
An XrSystemId
is returned by xrGetSystem representing the
system of devices the runtime will use to support a given
form factor.
Each system may include: a VR/AR display, various forms of input (gamepad,
touchpad, motion controller), and other trackable objects.
The application uses the system to create a session, which can then be used to accept input from the user and output rendered frames. The application also provides a default set of bindings from its actions to any number of input sources. The runtime may use this action information to activate only a subset of devices and avoid wasting resources on devices that are not in use. Exactly which devices are active once an XR system is selected will depend on the features provided by the runtime, and may vary from runtime to runtime. For example, a runtime that is capable of mapping from one tracking system’s space to another’s may support devices from multiple tracking systems simultaneously.
5.1. Form Factors
The first step in selecting a system is for the application to request its desired form factor. The form factor defines how the display(s) moves in the environment relative to the user’s head and how the user will interact with the XR experience. A runtime may support multiple form factors, such as on a mobile phone that supports both slide-in VR headset experiences and handheld AR experiences.
While an application’s core XR rendering may span across form factors, its user interface will often be written to target a particular form factor, requiring explicit tailoring to function well on other form factors. For example, screen-space UI designed for a handheld phone will produce an uncomfortable experience for users if presented in screen-space on an AR headset.
typedef enum XrFormFactor {
XR_FORM_FACTOR_HEAD_MOUNTED_DISPLAY = 1,
XR_FORM_FACTOR_HANDHELD_DISPLAY = 2,
XR_FORM_FACTOR_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrFormFactor;
The predefined form factors which may be supported by OpenXR runtimes are:
5.2. Getting the XrSystemId
XR_DEFINE_ATOM(XrSystemId)
An XrSystemId
is an opaque atom used by the runtime to identify a
system.
The value XR_NULL_SYSTEM_ID is considered an invalid system.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_NULL_SYSTEM_ID 0
The only XrSystemId
value defined to be constant across all
instances is the invalid system XR_NULL_SYSTEM_ID.
No supported system is associated with XR_NULL_SYSTEM_ID.
Unless explicitly permitted, it should not be passed to API calls or used
as a structure attribute when a valid XrSystemId
is required.
The xrGetSystem function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetSystem(
XrInstance instance,
const XrSystemGetInfo* getInfo,
XrSystemId* systemId);
To get an XrSystemId
, an application specifies its desired
form factor to xrGetSystem and gets the
runtime’s XrSystemId
associated with that configuration.
If the form factor is supported but temporarily unavailable,
xrGetSystem must return XR_ERROR_FORM_FACTOR_UNAVAILABLE
.
A runtime may return XR_SUCCESS
on a subsequent call for a form
factor it previously returned XR_ERROR_FORM_FACTOR_UNAVAILABLE
.
For example, connecting or warming up hardware might cause an unavailable
form factor to become available.
The XrSystemGetInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSystemGetInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrFormFactor formFactor;
} XrSystemGetInfo;
The XrSystemGetInfo structure specifies attributes about a system as desired by an application.
XrInstance instance; // previously initialized
XrSystemGetInfo system_get_info = {XR_TYPE_SYSTEM_GET_INFO};
system_get_info.formFactor = XR_FORM_FACTOR_HEAD_MOUNTED_DISPLAY;
XrSystemId systemId;
CHK_XR(xrGetSystem(instance, &system_get_info, &systemId));
// create session
// create swapchains
// begin session
// main loop
// end session
// destroy session
// no access to hardware after this point
5.3. System Properties
The xrGetSystemProperties function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetSystemProperties(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrSystemProperties* properties);
An application can call xrGetSystemProperties to retrieve information about the system such as vendor ID, system name, and graphics and tracking properties.
The XrSystemProperties structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSystemProperties {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrSystemId systemId;
uint32_t vendorId;
char systemName[XR_MAX_SYSTEM_NAME_SIZE];
XrSystemGraphicsProperties graphicsProperties;
XrSystemTrackingProperties trackingProperties;
} XrSystemProperties;
The runtime must report a valid vendor ID for the system. The vendor ID must be either the USB vendor ID defined for the physical device or a Khronos vendor ID.
The XrSystemGraphicsProperties structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSystemGraphicsProperties {
uint32_t maxSwapchainImageHeight;
uint32_t maxSwapchainImageWidth;
uint32_t maxLayerCount;
} XrSystemGraphicsProperties;
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_MIN_COMPOSITION_LAYERS_SUPPORTED 16
XR_MIN_COMPOSITION_LAYERS_SUPPORTED defines the minimum number of
composition layers that a conformant runtime must support.
A runtime must return the
XrSystemGraphicsProperties::maxLayerCount
at least the value of
XR_MIN_COMPOSITION_LAYERS_SUPPORTED.
The XrSystemTrackingProperties structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSystemTrackingProperties {
XrBool32 orientationTracking;
XrBool32 positionTracking;
} XrSystemTrackingProperties;
6. Path Tree and Semantic Paths
OpenXR incorporates an internal semantic path tree model, also known as the path tree, with entities associated with nodes organized in a logical tree and referenced by path name strings structured like a filesystem path or URL. The path tree unifies a number of concepts used in this specification and a runtime may add additional nodes as implementation details. As a general design principle, the most application-facing paths should have semantic and hierarchical meaning in their name. Thus, these paths are often referred to as semantic paths. However, path names in the path tree model may not all have the same level or kind of semantic meaning.
In regular use in an application, path name strings are converted to
instance-specific XrPath
values which are used in place of path
strings.
The mapping between XrPath
values and their corresponding path name
strings may be considered to be tracked by the runtime in a one-to-one
mapping in addition to the natural tree structure of the referenced
entities.
Runtimes may use any internal implementation that satisfies the
requirements.
Formally, the runtime maintains an instance-specific bijective mapping
between well-formed path name strings and valid XrPath
(uint64_t
) values.
These XrPath
values are only valid within a single
XrInstance, and applications must not share these values between
instances.
Applications must instead use the string representation of a path in their
code and configuration, and obtain the correct corresponding XrPath
at runtime in each XrInstance.
The term path or semantic path may refer interchangeably to either the
path name string or its associated XrPath
value within an instance
when context makes it clear which type is being discussed.
Given that path trees are a unifying model in this specification, the
entities referenced by paths can be of diverse types.
For example, they may be used to represent physical device or sensor
components, which may be of various component types.
They may also be used to represent frames of reference that are understood
by the application and the runtime, as defined by an XrSpace.
Additionally, to permit runtime re-configuration and support
hardware-independent development, any syntactically-valid path string may
be used to retrieve a corresponding XrPath
without error given
sufficient resources, even if no logical or hardware entity currently
corresponds to that path at the time of the call.
Later retrieval of the associated path string of such an XrPath
using xrPathToString should succeed if the other requirements of that
call are met.
However, using such an XrPath
in a later call to any other API
function may result in an error if no entity of the type required by the
call is available at the path at that later time.
A runtime should permit the entity referenced by a path to vary over time
to naturally reflect varying system configuration and hardware availability.
6.1. Path Atom Type
XR_DEFINE_ATOM(XrPath)
The XrPath
is an atom that connects an application with a single
path, within the context of a single instance.
There is a bijective mapping between well-formed path strings and atoms in
use.
This atom is used — in place of the path name string it corresponds to — to retrieve state and perform other operations.
As an XrPath
is only shorthand for a well-formed path string, they
have no explicit life cycle.
Lifetime is implicitly managed by the XrInstance.
An XrPath
must not be used unless it is received at execution time
from the runtime in the context of a particular XrInstance.
Therefore, with the exception of XR_NULL_PATH, XrPath
values
must not be specified as constant values in applications: the corresponding
path string should be used instead.
During the lifetime of a given XrInstance, the XrPath
associated with that instance with any given well-formed path must not
vary, and similarly the well-formed path string that corresponds to a given
XrPath
in that instance must not vary.
An XrPath
that is received from one XrInstance may not be
used with another.
Such an invalid use may be detected and result in an error being returned,
or it may result in undefined behavior.
Well-written applications should typically use a small, bounded set of
paths in practice.
However, the runtime should support looking up the XrPath
for a
large number of path strings for maximum compatibility.
Runtime implementers should keep in mind that applications supporting
diverse systems may look up path strings in a quantity exceeding the number
of non-empty entities predicted or provided by any one runtime’s own path
tree model, and this is not inherently an error.
However, system resources are finite and thus runtimes may signal
exhaustion of resources dedicated to these associations under certain
conditions.
When discussing the behavior of runtimes at these limits, a new
XrPath
refers to an XrPath
value that, as of some point in
time, has neither been received by the application nor tracked internally by
the runtime.
In this case, since an application has not yet received the value of such an
XrPath
, the runtime has not yet made any assertions about its
association with any path string.
In this context, new only refers to the fact that the mapping has not
necessarily been made constant for a given value/path string pair for the
remaining life of the associated instance by being revealed to the
application.
It does not necessarily imply creation of the entity, if any, referred to by
such a path.
Similarly, it does not imply the absence of such an entity prior to that
point.
Entities in the path tree have varied lifetime that is independent from the
duration of the mapping from path string to XrPath
.
For flexibility, the runtime may internally track or otherwise make
constant, in instance or larger scope, any mapping of a path string to an
XrPath
value even before an application would otherwise receive
that value, thus making it no longer new by the above definition.
When the runtime’s resources to track the path string-XrPath
mapping are exhausted, and the application makes an API call that would have
otherwise retrieved a new XrPath
as defined above, the runtime
must return XR_ERROR_PATH_COUNT_EXCEEDED
.
This includes both explicit calls to xrStringToPath as well as other
calls that retrieve an XrPath
in any other way.
The runtime should support creating as many paths as memory will allow and
must return XR_ERROR_PATH_COUNT_EXCEEDED
from relevant functions when
no more can be created.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_NULL_PATH 0
The only XrPath
value defined to be constant across all instances
is the invalid path XR_NULL_PATH.
No well-formed path string is associated with XR_NULL_PATH.
Unless explicitly permitted, it should not be passed to API calls or used
as a structure attribute when a valid XrPath
is required.
6.2. Well-Formed Path Strings
Even though they look similar, semantic paths are not file paths. To avoid confusion with file path directory traversal conventions, many file path conventions are explicitly disallowed from well-formed path name strings.
A well-formed path name string must conform to the following rules:
-
Path name strings must be constructed entirely from characters on the following list.
-
Lower case ASCII letters: a-z
-
Numeric digits: 0-9
-
Dash: -
-
Underscore: _
-
Period: .
-
Forward Slash: /
-
-
Path name strings must start with a single forward slash character.
-
Path name strings must not end with a forward slash character.
-
Path name strings must not contain two or more adjacent forward slash characters.
-
Path name strings must not contain two forward slash characters that are separated by only period characters.
-
Path name strings must not contain only period characters following the final forward slash character in the string.
-
The maximum string length for a path name string, including the terminating
\0
character, is defined byXR_MAX_PATH_LENGTH
.
6.2.1. xrStringToPath
The xrStringToPath function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrStringToPath(
XrInstance instance,
const char* pathString,
XrPath* path);
xrStringToPath retrieves the XrPath
value for a well-formed
path string.
If such a value had not yet been assigned by the runtime to the provided
path string in this XrInstance, one must be assigned at this point.
All calls to this function with the same XrInstance and path string
must retrieve the same XrPath
value.
Upon failure, xrStringToPath must return an appropriate
XrResult, and may set the output parameter to XR_NULL_PATH.
See Path Atom Type for the conditions under which an
error may be returned when this function is given a valid XrInstance
and a well-formed path string.
If the runtime’s resources are exhausted and it cannot create the path, a
return value of XR_ERROR_PATH_COUNT_EXCEEDED
must be returned.
If the application specifies a string that is not a well-formed path string,
XR_ERROR_PATH_FORMAT_INVALID
must be returned.
A return value of XR_SUCCESS from xrStringToPath may not
necessarily imply that the runtime has a component or other source of data
that will be accessible through that semantic path.
It only means that the path string supplied was well-formed and that the
retrieved XrPath maps to the given path string within and during
the lifetime of the XrInstance given.
|
6.2.2. xrPathToString
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrPathToString(
XrInstance instance,
XrPath path,
uint32_t bufferCapacityInput,
uint32_t* bufferCountOutput,
char* buffer);
xrPathToString retrieves the path name string associated with an
XrPath
, in the context of a given XrInstance, in the form of
a NULL
terminated string placed into a caller-allocated buffer.
Since the mapping between a well-formed path name string and an
XrPath
is bijective, there will always be exactly one string for
each valid XrPath
value.
This can be useful if the calling application receives an XrPath
value that they had not previously retrieved via xrStringToPath.
During the lifetime of the given XrInstance, the path name string
retrieved by this function for a given valid XrPath
will not
change.
For invalid paths, including XR_NULL_PATH, XR_ERROR_PATH_INVALID
must be returned.
6.3. Reserved Paths
In order for some uses of semantic paths to work consistently across runtimes, it is necessary to standardize several paths and require each runtime to use the same paths or patterns of paths for certain classes of usage. Those paths are as follows.
6.3.1. /user paths
Some paths are used to refer to entities that are filling semantic roles in the system. These paths are all under the /user subtree.
The reserved user paths are:
Runtimes are not required to provide interaction at all of these paths. For instance, in a system with no hand tracking, only /user/head would be active for interaction. In a system with only one controller, the runtime may provide access to that controller via either /user/hand/left or /user/hand/right as it deems appropriate.
The runtime may change the devices referred to by /user/hand/left and /user/hand/right at any time.
If more than two hand-held controllers or devices are active, the runtime must determine which two are accessible as /user/hand/left and /user/hand/right.
6.3.2. Input subpaths
Devices on the source side of the input system need to define paths for each component that can be bound to an action. This section describes the naming conventions for those input components. Runtimes must ignore input source paths that use identifiers and component names that do not appear in this specification or otherwise do not follow the pattern specified below.
Each input source path must match the following pattern:
-
…/input/<identifier>[_<location>][/<component>]
Identifiers are often the label on the component or related to the type and location of the component.
When specifying a suggested binding there are several cases where the component part of the path can be determined automatically. See Suggested Bindings for more details.
See Interaction Profiles for examples of input subpaths.
Standard identifiers
-
trackpad - A 2D input source that usually includes click and touch component.
-
thumbstick - A small 2D joystick that is meant to be used with the user’s thumb. These sometimes include click and/or touch components.
-
joystick - A 2D joystick that is meant to be used with the user’s entire hand, such as a flight stick. These generally do not have click component, but might have touch components.
-
trigger - A 1D analog input component that returns to a rest state when the user stops interacting with it. These sometime include touch and/or click components.
-
throttle - A 1D analog input component that remains in position when the user stops interacting with it.
-
trackball - A 2D relative input source. These sometimes include click components.
-
pedal - A 1D analog input component that is similar to a trigger but meant to be operated by a foot
-
system - A button with the specialised meaning that it enables the user to access system-level functions and UI. Input data from system buttons is generally used internally by runtimes and may not be available to applications.
-
dpad_up, dpad_down, dpad_left, and dpad_right - A set of buttons arranged in a plus shape.
-
diamond_up, diamond_down, diamond_left, and diamond_right - Gamepads often have a set of four buttons arranged in a diamond shape. The labels on those buttons vary from gamepad to gamepad, but their arrangement is consistent. These names are used for the A/B/X/Y buttons on a Xbox controller, and the square/cross/circle/triangle button on a PlayStation controller.
-
a, b, x, y, start, home, end, select - Standalone buttons are named for their physical labels. These are the standard identifiers for such buttons. Extensions may add new identifiers as detailed in the next section. Groups of four buttons in a diamond shape should use the diamond-prefix names above instead of using the labels on the buttons themselves.
-
volume_up, volume_down, mute_mic, play_pause, menu, view, back - Some other standard controls are often identified by icons. These are their standard names.
-
thumbrest - Some controllers have a place for the user to rest their thumb.
-
shoulder - A button that is usually pressed with the index finger and is often positioned above a trigger.
-
squeeze - An input source that indicates that the user is squeezing their fist closed. This could be a simple button or act more like a trigger. Sources with this identifier should either follow button or trigger conventions for their components.
-
wheel - A steering wheel.
Standard pose identifiers
Input sources whose orientation and/or position are tracked also expose pose identifiers.
Standard pose identifiers for tracked hands or motion controllers as represented by /user/hand/left and /user/hand/right are:
-
grip - A pose that allows applications to reliably render a virtual object held in the user’s hand, whether it is tracked directly or by a motion controller. The grip pose is defined as follows:
-
The grip position:
-
For tracked hands: The user’s palm centroid when closing the fist, at the surface of the palm.
-
For handheld motion controllers: A fixed position within the controller that generally lines up with the palm centroid when held by a hand in a neutral position. This position should be adjusted left or right to center the position within the controller’s grip.
-
-
The grip orientation’s +X axis: When you completely open your hand to form a flat 5-finger pose, the ray that is normal to the user’s palm (away from the palm in the left hand, into the palm in the right hand).
-
The grip orientation’s -Z axis: When you close your hand partially (as if holding the controller), the ray that goes through the center of the tube formed by your non-thumb fingers, in the direction of little finger to thumb.
-
The grip orientation’s +Y axis: orthogonal to +Z and +X using the right-hand rule.
-
-
aim - A pose that allows applications to point in the world using the input source, according to the platform’s conventions for aiming with that kind of source. The aim pose is defined as follows:
-
For tracked hands: The ray that follows platform conventions for how the user aims at objects in the world with their entire hand, with +Y up, +X to the right, and -Z forward. The ray chosen will be runtime-dependent, often a ray emerging from the hand at a target pointed by moving the forearm.
-
For handheld motion controllers: The ray that follows platform conventions for how the user targets objects in the world with the motion controller, with +Y up, +X to the right, and -Z forward. This is usually for applications that are rendering a model matching the physical controller, as an application rendering a virtual object in the user’s hand likely prefers to point based on the geometry of that virtual object. The ray chosen will be runtime-dependent, although this will often emerge from the frontmost tip of a motion controller.
-
Standard locations
When a single device contains multiple input sources that use the same identifier, a location suffix is added to create a unique identifier for that input source.
Standard locations are:
-
left
-
right
-
left_upper
-
left_lower
-
right_upper
-
right_lower
-
upper
-
lower
Standard components
Components are named for the specific boolean, scalar, or other value of the input source. Standard components are:
-
click - A physical switch has been pressed by the user. This is valid for all buttons, and is common for trackpads, thumbsticks, triggers, and dpads. "click" components are always boolean.
-
touch - The user has touched the input source. This is valid for all trackpads, and may be present for any other kind of input source if the device includes the necessary sensor. "touch" components are always boolean.
-
force - A 1D scalar value that represents the user applying force to the input. It varies from 0 to 1, with 0 being the rest state. This is present for any input source with a force sensor.
-
value - A 1D scalar value that varies from 0 to 1, with 0 being the rest state. This is present for triggers, throttles, and pedals. It may also be present for squeeze or other components.
-
x, y - scalar components of 2D values. These vary in value from -1 to 1. These represent the 2D position of the input source with 0 being the rest state on each axis. -1 means all the way left for x axis or all the way down for y axis. +1 means all the way right for x axis or all the way up for y axis. x and y components are present for trackpads, thumbsticks, and joysticks.
-
twist - Some sources, such as flight sticks, have a sensor that allows the user to twist the input left or right. For this component -1 means all the way left and 1 means all the way right.
-
pose - The orientation and/or position of this input source. This component may exist for dedicated pose identifiers like grip and aim, or may be defined on other identifiers such as trackpad to let applications reason about the surface of that part.
Output paths
Many devices also have subpaths for output features such as haptics. The runtime must ignore output component paths that do not follow the pattern:
-
…/output/<output_identifier>[_<location>]
Standard output identifiers are:
-
haptic - A haptic element like an LRA (Linear Resonant Actuator) or vibration motor
Devices which contain multiple haptic elements with the same output identifier must use a location suffix as specified above.
6.3.3. Adding input sources via extensions
Extensions may enable input source path identifiers, output source path identifiers, and component names that are not included in the core specification, subject to the following conditions:
-
EXT extensions must include the _ext suffix on any identifier or component name. E.g. …/input/newidentifier_ext/newcomponent_ext
-
Vendor extensions must include the vendor’s tag as a suffix on any identifier or component name. E.g. …/input/newidentifier_vendor/newcomponent_vendor (where "vendor" is replaced with the vendor’s actual extension tag.)
-
Khronos (KHR) extensions may add undecorated identifier or component names.
These rules are in place to prevent extensions from adding first class undecorated names that become defacto standards. Runtimes must ignore input source paths that do not follow the restrictions above.
Extensions may also add new location suffixes, and may do so by adding a new identifier and location combination using the appropriate suffix. E.g. …/input/newidentifier_newlocation_ext
6.4. Interaction Profile Paths
An interaction profile path identifies a collection of buttons and other input sources in a physical arrangement to allow applications and runtimes to coordinate action bindings.
Interaction profile paths are of the form:
-
/interaction_profiles/<vendor_name>/<type_name>
6.4.1. Khronos Simple Controller Profile
Path: /interaction_profiles/khr/simple_controller
Valid for user paths:
-
/user/hand/left
-
/user/hand/right
This interaction profile provides basic pose, button, and haptic support for applications with simple input needs. There is no hardware associated with the profile, and runtimes which support this profile should map the input paths provided to whatever the appropriate paths are on the actual hardware.
Supported component paths:
-
…/input/select/click
-
…/input/menu/click
-
…/input/grip/pose
-
…/input/aim/pose
-
…/output/haptic
6.4.2. Google Daydream Controller Profile
Path: /interaction_profiles/google/daydream_controller
Valid for user paths:
-
/user/hand/left
-
/user/hand/right
This interaction profile represents the input sources on the Google Daydream Controller.
Supported component paths:
-
…/input/select/click
-
…/input/trackpad/x
-
…/input/trackpad/y
-
…/input/trackpad/click
-
…/input/trackpad/touch
-
…/input/grip/pose
-
…/input/aim/pose
6.4.3. HTC Vive Controller Profile
Path: /interaction_profiles/htc/vive_controller
Valid for user paths:
-
/user/hand/left
-
/user/hand/right
This interaction profile represents the input sources and haptics on the Vive Controller.
Supported component paths:
-
…/input/system/click (may not be available for application use)
-
…/input/squeeze/click
-
…/input/menu/click
-
…/input/trigger/click
-
…/input/trigger/value
-
…/input/trackpad/x
-
…/input/trackpad/y
-
…/input/trackpad/click
-
…/input/trackpad/touch
-
…/input/grip/pose
-
…/input/aim/pose
-
…/output/haptic
6.4.4. HTC Vive Pro Profile
Path: /interaction_profiles/htc/vive_pro
Valid for user paths:
-
/user/head
This interaction profile represents the input sources on the Vive Pro headset.
Supported component paths:
-
…/input/system/click (may not be available for application use)
-
…/input/volume_up/click
-
…/input/volume_down/click
-
…/input/mute_mic/click
6.4.5. Microsoft Mixed Reality Motion Controller Profile
Path: /interaction_profiles/microsoft/motion_controller
Valid for user paths:
-
/user/hand/left
-
/user/hand/right
This interaction profile represents the input sources and haptics on the Microsoft Mixed Reality Controller.
Supported component paths:
-
…/input/menu/click
-
…/input/squeeze/click
-
…/input/trigger/value
-
…/input/thumbstick/x
-
…/input/thumbstick/y
-
…/input/thumbstick/click
-
…/input/trackpad/x
-
…/input/trackpad/y
-
…/input/trackpad/click
-
…/input/trackpad/touch
-
…/input/grip/pose
-
…/input/aim/pose
-
…/output/haptic
6.4.6. Microsoft Xbox Controller Profile
Path: /interaction_profiles/microsoft/xbox_controller
Valid for user paths:
-
/user/gamepad
This interaction profile represents the input sources and haptics on the Microsoft Xbox Controller.
Supported component paths:
-
…/input/menu/click
-
…/input/view/click
-
…/input/a/click
-
…/input/b/click
-
…/input/x/click
-
…/input/y/click
-
…/input/dpad_down/click
-
…/input/dpad_right/click
-
…/input/dpad_up/click
-
…/input/dpad_left/click
-
…/input/shoulder_left/click
-
…/input/shoulder_right/click
-
…/input/thumbstick_left/click
-
…/input/thumbstick_right/click
-
…/input/trigger_left/value
-
…/input/trigger_right/value
-
…/input/thumbstick_left/x
-
…/input/thumbstick_left/y
-
…/input/thumbstick_right/x
-
…/input/thumbstick_right/y
-
…/output/haptic_left
-
…/output/haptic_right
-
…/output/haptic_left_trigger
-
…/output/haptic_right_trigger
6.4.7. Oculus Go Controller Profile
Path: /interaction_profiles/oculus/go_controller
Valid for user paths:
-
/user/hand/left
-
/user/hand/right
This interaction profile represents the input sources on the Oculus Go controller.
Supported component paths:
-
…/input/system/click (may not be available for application use)
-
…/input/trigger/click
-
…/input/back/click
-
…/input/trackpad/x
-
…/input/trackpad/y
-
…/input/trackpad/click
-
…/input/trackpad/touch
-
…/input/grip/pose
-
…/input/aim/pose
6.4.8. Oculus Touch Controller Profile
Path: /interaction_profiles/oculus/touch_controller
Valid for user paths:
-
/user/hand/left
-
/user/hand/right
This interaction profile represents the input sources and haptics on the Oculus Touch controller.
Supported component paths:
-
On /user/hand/left only:
-
…/input/x/click
-
…/input/x/touch
-
…/input/y/click
-
…/input/y/touch
-
…/input/menu/click
-
-
On /user/hand/right only:
-
…/input/a/click
-
…/input/a/touch
-
…/input/b/click
-
…/input/b/touch
-
…/input/system/click (may not be available for application use)
-
-
…/input/squeeze/value
-
…/input/trigger/value
-
…/input/trigger/touch
-
…/input/thumbstick/x
-
…/input/thumbstick/y
-
…/input/thumbstick/click
-
…/input/thumbstick/touch
-
…/input/thumbrest/touch
-
…/input/grip/pose
-
…/input/aim/pose
-
…/output/haptic
6.4.9. Valve Index Controller Profile
Path: /interaction_profiles/valve/index_controller
Valid for user paths:
-
/user/hand/left
-
/user/hand/right
This interaction profile represents the input sources and haptics on the Valve Index controller.
Supported component paths:
-
…/input/system/click (may not be available for application use)
-
…/input/system/touch (may not be available for application use)
-
…/input/a/click
-
…/input/a/touch
-
…/input/b/click
-
…/input/b/touch
-
…/input/squeeze/value
-
…/input/squeeze/force
-
…/input/trigger/click
-
…/input/trigger/value
-
…/input/trigger/touch
-
…/input/thumbstick/x
-
…/input/thumbstick/y
-
…/input/thumbstick/click
-
…/input/thumbstick/touch
-
…/input/trackpad/x
-
…/input/trackpad/y
-
…/input/trackpad/force
-
…/input/trackpad/touch
-
…/input/grip/pose
-
…/input/aim/pose
-
…/output/haptic
7. Spaces
Across both virtual reality and augmented reality, XR applications have a core need to map the location of virtual objects to the corresponding real-world locations where they will be rendered. Spaces allow applications to explicitly create and specify the frames of reference in which they choose to track the real world, and then determine how those frames of reference move relative to one another over time.
XR_DEFINE_HANDLE(XrSpace)
Spaces are represented by XrSpace handles, which the application creates and then uses in API calls. Whenever an application calls a function that returns coordinates, it provides an XrSpace to specify the frame of reference in which those coordinates will be expressed. Similarly, when providing coordinates to a function, the application specifies which XrSpace the runtime should use to interpret those coordinates.
OpenXR defines a set of well-known reference spaces that applications
use to bootstrap their spatial reasoning.
These reference spaces are: VIEW
, LOCAL
and STAGE
.
Each reference space has a well-defined meaning, which establishes where its
origin is positioned and how its axes are oriented.
Runtimes whose tracking systems improve their understanding of the world
over time may track spaces independently.
For example, even though a LOCAL
space and a STAGE
space each map their
origin to a static position in the world, a runtime with an inside-out
tracking system may introduce slight adjustments to the origin of each
space on a continuous basis to keep each origin in place.
Beyond well-known reference spaces, runtimes expose other independently-tracked spaces, such as a pose action space that tracks the pose of a motion controller over time.
When one or both spaces are tracking a dynamic object, passing in an updated
time to xrLocateSpace each frame will result in an updated relative
pose.
For example, the location of the left hand’s pose action space in the
STAGE
reference space will change each frame as the user’s hand moves
relative to the stage’s predefined origin on the floor.
In other XR APIs, it is common to report the "pose" of an object relative to
some presumed underlying global space.
This API is careful to not explicitly define such an underlying global
space, because it does not apply to all systems.
Some systems will support no STAGE
space, while others may support a
STAGE
space that switches between various physical stages with dynamic
availability.
To satisfy this wide variability, "poses" are always described as the
relationship between two spaces.
Some devices improve their understanding of the world as the device is used. The location returned by xrLocateSpace in later frames may change over time, even for spaces that track static objects, as either the target space or base space adjusts its origin.
Composition layers submitted by the application include an XrSpace for
the runtime to use to position that layer over time.
Composition layers whose XrSpace is relative to the VIEW
reference
space are implicitly "head-locked", even if they may not be "display-locked"
for non-head-mounted form factors.
7.1. Reference Spaces
An XrSpace handle for a reference space is created using xrCreateReferenceSpace, by specifying the chosen reference space type and a pose within the natural reference frame defined for that reference space type.
Runtimes implement well-known reference spaces from XrReferenceSpaceType if they support tracking of that kind:
typedef enum XrReferenceSpaceType {
XR_REFERENCE_SPACE_TYPE_VIEW = 1,
XR_REFERENCE_SPACE_TYPE_LOCAL = 2,
XR_REFERENCE_SPACE_TYPE_STAGE = 3,
XR_REFERENCE_SPACE_TYPE_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrReferenceSpaceType;
Available reference space types are indicated by xrEnumerateReferenceSpaces. Note that other spaces can be created as well, such as pose action spaces created by xrCreateActionSpace, which are not enumerated by that API.
XR systems may have limited real world spatial ranges in which users can freely move around while remaining tracked. Applications may wish to query these boundaries and alter application behavior or content placement to ensure the user can complete the experience while remaining within the boundary. Applications can query this information using xrGetReferenceSpaceBoundsRect.
When called, xrGetReferenceSpaceBoundsRect should return the extents
of a rectangle that is clear of obstacles down to the floor, allowing where
the user can freely move while remaining tracked, if available for that
reference space.
The returned extent represents the dimensions of an axis-aligned bounding
box where the XrExtent2Df::width
and
XrExtent2Df::height
fields correspond to the X and Z axes of the
provided space, with the extents centered at the origin of the space.
Not all systems or spaces may support boundaries.
If a runtime is unable to provide bounds for a given space,
XR_SPACE_BOUNDS_UNAVAILABLE
will be returned and all fields of
bounds
will be set to 0.
The returned extents are expressed relative to the natural origin of the provided XrReferenceSpaceType and must not incorporate any origin offsets specified by the application during calls to xrCreateReferenceSpace.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_REFERENCE_SPACE_UNSUPPORTED
if the
XrReferenceSpaceType passed in referenceSpaceType
is not
supported by this session
.
When a runtime will begin operating with updated space bounds, the runtime must queue a corresponding XrEventDataReferenceSpaceChangePending event.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetReferenceSpaceBoundsRect(
XrSession session,
XrReferenceSpaceType referenceSpaceType,
XrExtent2Df* bounds);
The XrEventDataReferenceSpaceChangePending event is sent to the application to notify it that the origin (and perhaps the bounds) of a reference space is changing. This may occur due to the user recentering the space explicitly, or the runtime otherwise switching to a different space definition.
The reference space change must only take effect for xrLocateSpace or
xrLocateViews calls whose XrTime
parameter is greater than or
equal to the changeTime
provided in that event.
Runtimes should provide a changeTime
to applications that allows for
a deep render pipeline to present frames that are already in flight using
the previous definition of the space.
Runtimes should choose a changeTime
that is midway between the
XrFrameState::predictedDisplayTime
of future frames to avoid
threshold issues with applications that calculate future frame times using
XrFrameState::predictedDisplayPeriod
.
The poseInPreviousSpace
provided here must only describe the change
in the natural origin of the reference space and must not incorporate any
origin offsets specified by the application during calls to
xrCreateReferenceSpace.
If the runtime does not know the location of the space’s new origin relative
to its previous origin, poseValid
must be false, and the position and
orientation of poseInPreviousSpace
are undefined.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrEventDataReferenceSpaceChangePending {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSession session;
XrReferenceSpaceType referenceSpaceType;
XrTime changeTime;
XrBool32 poseValid;
XrPosef poseInPreviousSpace;
} XrEventDataReferenceSpaceChangePending;
7.2. Action Spaces
An XrSpace handle for a pose action is created using xrCreateActionSpace, by specifying the chosen pose action and a pose within the action’s natural reference frame.
Runtimes support suggested pose action bindings to well-known user paths with …/pose subpaths if they support tracking for that particular identifier.
Some example well-known pose action paths:
For definitions of these well-known pose device paths, see the discussion of device input subpaths in the Semantic Paths chapter.
7.2.1. Action Spaces Lifetime
XrSpace handles created for a pose action must be unlocatable unless the action set that contains the corresponding pose action was set as active via the most recent xrSyncActions call. If the underlying device that is active for the action changes, the device this space is tracking must only change to track the new device when xrSyncActions is called.
If xrLocateSpace is called with an unlocatable action space, the
implementation must return no position or orientation and both
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_VALID_BIT
and
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_ORIENTATION_VALID_BIT
must be unset.
If XrSpaceVelocity is also supplied,
XR_SPACE_VELOCITY_LINEAR_VALID_BIT
and
XR_SPACE_VELOCITY_ANGULAR_VALID_BIT
must be unset.
If xrLocateViews is called with an unlocatable action space, the
implementation must return no position or orientation and both
XR_VIEW_STATE_POSITION_VALID_BIT
and
XR_VIEW_STATE_ORIENTATION_VALID_BIT
must be unset.
7.3. Space Lifecycle
There are a small set of core APIs that allow applications to reason about reference spaces, action spaces, and their relative locations.
7.3.1. xrEnumerateReferenceSpaces
The xrEnumerateReferenceSpaces function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEnumerateReferenceSpaces(
XrSession session,
uint32_t spaceCapacityInput,
uint32_t* spaceCountOutput,
XrReferenceSpaceType* spaces);
Enumerates the set of reference space types that this runtime supports for a given session. Runtimes must always return identical buffer contents from this enumeration for the lifetime of the session.
If a session enumerates support for a given reference space type, calls to xrCreateReferenceSpace must succeed for that session, with any transient unavailability of poses expressed later during calls to xrLocateSpace.
7.3.2. xrCreateReferenceSpace
The xrCreateReferenceSpace function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrCreateReferenceSpace(
XrSession session,
const XrReferenceSpaceCreateInfo* createInfo,
XrSpace* space);
Creates an XrSpace handle based on a chosen reference space. Application can provide an XrPosef to define the position and orientation of the new space’s origin within the natural reference frame of the reference space.
Multiple XrSpace handles may exist simultaneously, up to some limit imposed by the runtime. The XrSpace handle must be eventually freed via the xrDestroySpace function.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_REFERENCE_SPACE_UNSUPPORTED
if the
given reference space type is not supported by this session
.
The XrReferenceSpaceCreateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrReferenceSpaceCreateInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrReferenceSpaceType referenceSpaceType;
XrPosef poseInReferenceSpace;
} XrReferenceSpaceCreateInfo;
7.3.3. xrCreateActionSpace
The xrCreateActionSpace function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrCreateActionSpace(
XrSession session,
const XrActionSpaceCreateInfo* createInfo,
XrSpace* space);
Creates an XrSpace handle based on a chosen pose action. Application can provide an XrPosef to define the position and orientation of the new space’s origin within the natural reference frame of the action space.
Multiple XrSpace handles may exist simultaneously, up to some limit imposed by the runtime. The XrSpace handle must be eventually freed via the xrDestroySpace function or by destroying the parent XrAction handle.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_ACTION_TYPE_MISMATCH
if the action
provided in XrActionSpaceCreateInfo::action
is not of type
XR_ACTION_TYPE_POSE_INPUT
.
The XrActionSpaceCreateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionSpaceCreateInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrAction action;
XrPath subactionPath;
XrPosef poseInActionSpace;
} XrActionSpaceCreateInfo;
7.3.4. xrDestroySpace
The xrDestroySpace function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrDestroySpace(
XrSpace space);
XrSpace handles are destroyed using xrDestroySpace. The runtime may still use this space if there are active dependencies (e.g, compositions in progress).
7.4. Locating Spaces
Applications use the xrLocateSpace function to find the pose of an
XrSpace’s origin within a base XrSpace at a given historical or
predicted time.
If an application wants to know the velocity of the space’s origin, it can
chain an XrSpaceVelocity structure to the next
pointer of the
XrSpaceLocation structure when calling the xrLocateSpace
function.
Applications should inspect the output XrSpaceLocationFlagBits and
XrSpaceVelocityFlagBits to determine the validity and tracking status
of the components of the location.
7.4.1. xrLocateSpace
xrLocateSpace provides the physical location of a space in a base space at a specified time, if currently known by the runtime.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrLocateSpace(
XrSpace space,
XrSpace baseSpace,
XrTime time,
XrSpaceLocation* location);
For a time
in the past, the runtime should locate the spaces based on
the runtime’s most accurate current understanding of how the world was at
that historical time.
For a time
in the future, the runtime should locate the spaces based
on the runtime’s most up-to-date prediction of how the world will be at that
future time.
The minimum valid range of values for time
are described in
Prediction Time Limits.
For values of time
outside this range, xrLocateSpace may return
a location with no position and XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_VALID_BIT
unset.
Some devices improve their understanding of the world as the device is used.
The location returned by xrLocateSpace for a given space
,
baseSpace
and time
may change over time, even for spaces that
track static objects, as one or both spaces adjust their origins.
During tracking loss of space
relative to baseSpace
, runtimes
should continue to provide inferred or last-known
XrPosef::position
and XrPosef::orientation
values.
These inferred poses can, for example, be based on neck model updates,
inertial dead reckoning, or a last-known position, so long as it is still
reasonable for the application to use that pose.
While a runtime is providing position data, it must continue to set
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_VALID_BIT
but it can clear
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_TRACKED_BIT
to indicate that the position
is inferred or last-known in this way.
If the runtime has not yet observed even a last-known pose for how to locate
space
in baseSpace
(e.g. one space is an action space bound to a
motion controller that has not yet been detected, or the two spaces are in
disconnected fragments of the runtime’s tracked volume), the runtime should
return a location with no position and
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_VALID_BIT
unset.
The runtime must return a location with both
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_VALID_BIT
and
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_TRACKED_BIT
set when locating space
and baseSpace
if both spaces were created relative to the same entity
(e.g. two action spaces for the same action), even if the entity is
currently untracked.
The location in this case is the difference in the two spaces'
application-specified transforms relative to that common entity.
During tracking loss, the runtime should return a location with
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_VALID_BIT
and
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_ORIENTATION_VALID_BIT
set and
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_TRACKED_BIT
and
XR_SPACE_LOCATION_ORIENTATION_TRACKED_BIT
unset for spaces tracking
two static entities in the world when their relative pose is known to the
runtime.
This enables applications to continue to make use of the runtime’s latest
knowledge of the world.
If an XrSpaceVelocity structure is chained to the
XrSpaceLocation::next
pointer, and the velocity is observed or
can be calculated by the runtime, the runtime must fill in the linear
velocity of the origin of space within the reference frame of
baseSpace
and set the XR_SPACE_VELOCITY_LINEAR_VALID_BIT
.
Similarly, if an XrSpaceVelocity structure is chained to the
XrSpaceLocation::next
pointer, and the angular velocity is
observed or can be calculated by the runtime, the runtime must fill in the
angular velocity of the origin of space within the reference frame of
baseSpace
and set the XR_SPACE_VELOCITY_ANGULAR_VALID_BIT
.
The following example code shows how an application can get both the
location and velocity of a space within a base space using the
xrLocateSpace function by chaining an XrSpaceVelocity to the
next
pointer of XrSpaceLocation and calling xrLocateSpace.
XrSpace space; // previously initialized
XrSpace baseSpace; // previously initialized
XrTime time; // previously initialized
XrSpaceVelocity velocity {XR_TYPE_SPACE_VELOCITY};
XrSpaceLocation location {XR_TYPE_SPACE_LOCATION, &velocity};
xrLocateSpace(space, baseSpace, time, &location);
The XrSpaceLocation structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSpaceLocation {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrSpaceLocationFlags locationFlags;
XrPosef pose;
} XrSpaceLocation;
The XrSpaceLocation::locationFlags
member is of the following
type, and contains a bitwise-OR of zero or more of the bits defined in
XrSpaceLocationFlagBits.
typedef XrFlags64 XrSpaceLocationFlags;
Valid bits for XrSpaceLocationFlags are defined by XrSpaceLocationFlagBits, which is specified as:
// Flag bits for XrSpaceLocationFlags
static const XrSpaceLocationFlags XR_SPACE_LOCATION_ORIENTATION_VALID_BIT = 0x00000001;
static const XrSpaceLocationFlags XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_VALID_BIT = 0x00000002;
static const XrSpaceLocationFlags XR_SPACE_LOCATION_ORIENTATION_TRACKED_BIT = 0x00000004;
static const XrSpaceLocationFlags XR_SPACE_LOCATION_POSITION_TRACKED_BIT = 0x00000008;
The flag bits have the following meanings:
The XrSpaceVelocity structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrSpaceVelocity {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrSpaceVelocityFlags velocityFlags;
XrVector3f linearVelocity;
XrVector3f angularVelocity;
} XrSpaceVelocity;
The XrSpaceVelocity::velocityFlags
member is of the following
type, and contains a bitwise-OR of zero or more of the bits defined in
XrSpaceVelocityFlagBits.
typedef XrFlags64 XrSpaceVelocityFlags;
Valid bits for XrSpaceVelocityFlags are defined by XrSpaceVelocityFlagBits, which is specified as:
// Flag bits for XrSpaceVelocityFlags
static const XrSpaceVelocityFlags XR_SPACE_VELOCITY_LINEAR_VALID_BIT = 0x00000001;
static const XrSpaceVelocityFlags XR_SPACE_VELOCITY_ANGULAR_VALID_BIT = 0x00000002;
The flag bits have the following meanings:
8. View Configurations
A view configuration is a semantically meaningful set of one or more views for which an application can render images. A primary view configuration is a view configuration intended to be presented to the viewer interacting with the XR application. This distinction allows the later addition of additional views, for example views which are intended for spectators.
A typical head-mounted VR system has a view configuration with two views, while a typical phone-based AR system has a view configuration with a single view. A simple multi-wall projection-based (CAVE-like) VR system may have a view configuration with at least one view for each display surface (wall, floor, ceiling) in the room.
For any supported form factor, a system will support one or more primary view configurations. Supporting more than one primary view configuration can be useful if a system supports a special view configuration optimized for the hardware but also supports a more broadly used view configuration as a compatibility fallback.
View configurations are identified with an XrViewConfigurationType.
8.1. Primary View Configurations
typedef enum XrViewConfigurationType {
XR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_PRIMARY_MONO = 1,
XR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_PRIMARY_STEREO = 2,
XR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrViewConfigurationType;
The application selects its primary view configuration type when calling xrBeginSession, and that configuration remains constant for the lifetime of the session, until xrEndSession is called.
The number of views and the semantic meaning of each view index within a given view configuration is well-defined, specified below for all core view configurations. The predefined primary view configuration types are:
8.2. View Configuration API
First an application needs to select which primary view configuration it wants to use. If it supports multiple configurations, an application can call xrEnumerateViewConfigurations before creating an XrSession to get a list of the view configuration types supported for a given system.
The application can then call xrGetViewConfigurationProperties and xrEnumerateViewConfigurationViews to get detailed information about each view configuration type and its individual views.
8.2.1. xrEnumerateViewConfigurations
The xrEnumerateViewConfigurations function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEnumerateViewConfigurations(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
uint32_t viewConfigurationTypeCapacityInput,
uint32_t* viewConfigurationTypeCountOutput,
XrViewConfigurationType* viewConfigurationTypes);
xrEnumerateViewConfigurations enumerates the view configuration types
supported by the XrSystemId
.
The supported set for that system must not change during the lifetime of
its XrInstance.
The returned list of primary view configurations should be in order from
what the runtime considered highest to lowest user preference.
Thus the first enumerated view configuration type should be the one the
runtime prefers the application to use if possible.
Runtimes must always return identical buffer contents from this enumeration
for the given systemId
and for the lifetime of the instance.
8.2.2. xrGetViewConfigurationProperties
The xrGetViewConfigurationProperties function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetViewConfigurationProperties(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrViewConfigurationType viewConfigurationType,
XrViewConfigurationProperties* configurationProperties);
xrGetViewConfigurationProperties queries properties of an individual
view configuration.
Applications must use one of the supported view configuration types
returned by xrEnumerateViewConfigurations.
If viewConfigurationType
is not supported by this XrInstance the
runtime must return XR_ERROR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_UNSUPPORTED
.
8.2.3. XrViewConfigurationProperties
The XrViewConfigurationProperties structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrViewConfigurationProperties {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrViewConfigurationType viewConfigurationType;
XrBool32 fovMutable;
} XrViewConfigurationProperties;
8.2.4. xrEnumerateViewConfigurationViews
The xrEnumerateViewConfigurationViews function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEnumerateViewConfigurationViews(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrViewConfigurationType viewConfigurationType,
uint32_t viewCapacityInput,
uint32_t* viewCountOutput,
XrViewConfigurationView* views);
Each XrViewConfigurationType defines the number of views associated
with it.
Applications can query more details of each view element using
xrEnumerateViewConfigurationViews.
If the supplied viewConfigurationType
is not supported by this
XrInstance and XrSystemId
, the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_UNSUPPORTED
.
Runtimes must always return identical buffer contents from this enumeration
for the given systemId
and viewConfigurationType
for the
lifetime of the instance.
8.2.5. XrViewConfigurationView
Each XrViewConfigurationView specifies properties related to rendering of an individual view within a view configuration.
The XrViewConfigurationView structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrViewConfigurationView {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
uint32_t recommendedImageRectWidth;
uint32_t maxImageRectWidth;
uint32_t recommendedImageRectHeight;
uint32_t maxImageRectHeight;
uint32_t recommendedSwapchainSampleCount;
uint32_t maxSwapchainSampleCount;
} XrViewConfigurationView;
See XrSwapchainSubImage for more information about
XrSwapchainSubImage::imageRect
values, and
XrSwapchainCreateInfo for more information about creating swapchains
appropriately sized to support those
XrSwapchainSubImage::imageRect
values.
The array of XrViewConfigurationView returned by the runtime must adhere to the rules defined in XrViewConfigurationType, such as the count and association to the left and right eyes.
8.3. Example View Configuration Code
XrInstance instance; // previously initialized
XrSystemId system; // previously initialized
XrSession session; // previously initialized
XrSpace sceneSpace; // previously initialized
// Enumerate the view configurations paths.
uint32_t configurationCount;
CHK_XR(xrEnumerateViewConfigurations(instance, system, 0, &configurationCount, nullptr));
std::vector<XrViewConfigurationType> configurationTypes(configurationCount);
CHK_XR(xrEnumerateViewConfigurations(instance, system, configurationCount, &configurationCount, configurationTypes.data()));
bool configFound = false;
XrViewConfigurationType viewConfig = XR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_MAX_ENUM;
for(uint32_t i = 0; i < configurationCount; ++i)
{
if (configurationTypes[i] == XR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_PRIMARY_STEREO)
{
configFound = true;
viewConfig = configurationTypes[i];
break; // Pick the first supported, i.e. preferred, view configuration.
}
}
if (!configFound)
return; // Cannot support any view configuration of this system.
// Get detailed information of each view element.
uint32_t viewCount;
CHK_XR(xrEnumerateViewConfigurationViews(instance, system,
viewConfig,
0,
&viewCount,
nullptr));
std::vector<XrViewConfigurationView> configViews(viewCount, {XR_TYPE_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_VIEW});
CHK_XR(xrEnumerateViewConfigurationViews(instance, system,
viewConfig,
viewCount,
&viewCount,
configViews.data()));
// Set the primary view configuration for the session.
XrSessionBeginInfo beginInfo = {XR_TYPE_SESSION_BEGIN_INFO};
beginInfo.primaryViewConfigurationType = viewConfig;
CHK_XR(xrBeginSession(session, &beginInfo));
// Allocate a buffer according to viewCount.
std::vector<XrView> views(viewCount, {XR_TYPE_VIEW});
// Run a per-frame loop.
while (!quit)
{
// Wait for a new frame.
XrFrameWaitInfo frameWaitInfo{XR_TYPE_FRAME_WAIT_INFO};
XrFrameState frameState{XR_TYPE_FRAME_STATE};
CHK_XR(xrWaitFrame(session, &frameWaitInfo, &frameState));
// Begin frame immediately before GPU work
XrFrameBeginInfo frameBeginInfo { XR_TYPE_FRAME_BEGIN_INFO };
CHK_XR(xrBeginFrame(session, &frameBeginInfo));
std::vector<XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader*> layers;
XrCompositionLayerProjectionView projViews[2] = { /*...*/ };
XrCompositionLayerProjection layerProj{ XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_PROJECTION};
if (frameState.shouldRender) {
XrViewLocateInfo viewLocateInfo{XR_TYPE_VIEW_LOCATE_INFO};
viewLocateInfo.viewConfigurationType = viewConfig;
viewLocateInfo.displayTime = frameState.predictedDisplayTime;
viewLocateInfo.space = sceneSpace;
XrViewState viewState{XR_TYPE_VIEW_STATE};
XrView views[2] = { {XR_TYPE_VIEW}, {XR_TYPE_VIEW}};
uint32_t viewCountOutput;
CHK_XR(xrLocateViews(session, &viewLocateInfo, &viewState, configViews.size(), &viewCountOutput, views));
// ...
// Use viewState and frameState for scene render, and fill in projViews[2]
// ...
// Assemble composition layers structure
layerProj.layerFlags = XR_COMPOSITION_LAYER_BLEND_TEXTURE_SOURCE_ALPHA_BIT;
layerProj.space = sceneSpace;
layerProj.viewCount = 2;
layerProj.views = projViews;
layers.push_back(reinterpret_cast<XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader*>(&layerProj));
}
// End frame and submit layers, even if layers is empty due to shouldRender = false
XrFrameEndInfo frameEndInfo{ XR_TYPE_FRAME_END_INFO};
frameEndInfo.displayTime = frameState.predictedDisplayTime;
frameEndInfo.environmentBlendMode = XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_OPAQUE;
frameEndInfo.layerCount = (uint32_t)layers.size();
frameEndInfo.layers = layers.data();
CHK_XR(xrEndFrame(session, &frameEndInfo));
}
9. Session
XR_DEFINE_HANDLE(XrSession)
A session represents an application’s intention to display XR content to the user.
9.1. Session Lifecycle
A typical XR session coordinates the application and the runtime through session control functions and session state events.
|
A session is considered running after a successful
call to xrBeginSession and remains running until any call is made to
xrEndSession.
Certain functions are only valid to call when a session is running, such as
xrWaitFrame, or else the XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_RUNNING
error
must be returned by the runtime.
A session is considered not running before a
successful call to xrBeginSession and becomes not running again after
any call is made to xrEndSession.
Certain functions are only valid to call when a session is not running, such
as xrBeginSession, or else the XR_ERROR_SESSION_RUNNING
error
must be returned by the runtime.
If an error is returned from xrBeginSession, the session remains in its current running or not running state. Calling xrEndSession always transitions a session to the not running state, regardless of any errors returned.
Only running sessions may become focused sessions that receive XR input. When a session is not running, the application must not submit frames. This is important because without a running session, the runtime no longer has to spend resources on sub-systems (tracking etc.) that are no longer needed by the application.
An application must call xrBeginSession when the session is in the
XR_SESSION_STATE_READY
state, or
XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_READY
will be returned; it must call
xrEndSession when the session is in the XR_SESSION_STATE_STOPPING
state, otherwise
XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_STOPPING
will be returned.
This is to allow the runtimes to seamlessly transition from one
application’s session to another.
The application can call xrDestroySession at any time during the
session life cycle, however, it must stop using the XrSession handle
immediately in all threads and stop using any related resources.
Therefore, it’s typically undesirable to destroy a
running session and instead it’s recommended to wait for
XR_SESSION_STATE_EXITING
to destroy a session.
9.2. Session Creation
To present graphical content on an output device, OpenXR applications need to pick a graphics API which is supported by the runtime. Unextended OpenXR does not support any graphics APIs natively but provides a number of extensions of which each runtime can support any subset. These extensions can be activated during XrInstance create time.
During XrSession creation the application must provide information
about which graphics API it intends to use by adding an
XrGraphicsBinding*
struct of one (and only one) of the enabled
graphics API extensions to the next chain of XrSessionCreateInfo.
The application must call the xrGet*GraphicsRequirements
method
(where *
is a placeholder) provided by the chosen graphics API extension
before attempting to create the session (for example,
xrGetD3D11GraphicsRequirementsKHR
xrGetD3D12GraphicsRequirementsKHR
xrGetOpenGLGraphicsRequirementsKHR
xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirementsKHR
xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirements2KHR
).
Unless specified differently in the graphics API extension, the application
is responsible for creating a valid graphics device binding based on the
requirements returned by xrGet*GraphicsRequirements
methods (for
details refer to the extension specification of the graphics API).
The xrCreateSession function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrCreateSession(
XrInstance instance,
const XrSessionCreateInfo* createInfo,
XrSession* session);
Creates a session using the provided createInfo
and returns a handle
to that session.
This session is created in the XR_SESSION_STATE_IDLE
state, and a
corresponding XrEventDataSessionStateChanged event to the
XR_SESSION_STATE_IDLE
state must be generated as the first such event
for the new session.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
(XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
may be returned due to legacy behavior)
on calls to xrCreateSession if a function named like
xrGet*GraphicsRequirements
has not been called for the same
instance
and XrSessionCreateInfo::systemId
.
(See graphics binding extensions for details.)
The XrSessionCreateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSessionCreateInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSessionCreateFlags createFlags;
XrSystemId systemId;
} XrSessionCreateInfo;
The XrSessionCreateInfo::createFlags
member is of the following
type, and contains a bitwise-OR of zero or more of the bits defined in
XrSessionCreateFlagBits.
typedef XrFlags64 XrSessionCreateFlags;
Valid bits for XrSessionCreateFlags are defined by XrSessionCreateFlagBits.
// Flag bits for XrSessionCreateFlags
There are currently no session creation flags. This is reserved for future use.
The xrDestroySession function is defined as.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrDestroySession(
XrSession session);
XrSession handles are destroyed using xrDestroySession. When an XrSession is destroyed, all handles that are children of that XrSession are also destroyed.
The application is responsible for ensuring that it has no calls using
session
in progress when the session is destroyed.
xrDestroySession can be called when the session is in any session state.
9.3. Session Control
The xrBeginSession function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrBeginSession(
XrSession session,
const XrSessionBeginInfo* beginInfo);
When the application receives XrEventDataSessionStateChanged event
with the XR_SESSION_STATE_READY
state, the application should then
call xrBeginSession to start rendering frames for display to the user.
After this function successfully returns, the session is considered to be running. The application should then start its frame loop consisting of some sequence of xrWaitFrame/xrBeginFrame/xrEndFrame calls.
If the session is already running when the application
calls xrBeginSession, the runtime must return error
XR_ERROR_SESSION_RUNNING
.
If the session is not running when the application
calls xrBeginSession, but the session is not yet in the
XR_SESSION_STATE_READY
state, the runtime must return error
XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_READY
.
Note that a runtime may decide not to show the user any given frame from a
session at any time, for example if the user has switched to a different
application’s running session.
The application should check whether xrWaitFrame returns
XrFrameState::shouldRender
set to true before rendering a given
frame to determine whether that frame will be visible to the user.
Runtime session frame state must start in a reset state when a session transitions to running so that no state is carried over from when the same session was previously running. Frame state in this context includes xrWaitFrame, xrBeginFrame, and xrEndFrame call order enforcement.
If XrSessionBeginInfo::primaryViewConfigurationType
in
beginInfo
is not supported by the XrSystemId
used to create
the session
, the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_UNSUPPORTED
.
The XrSessionBeginInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSessionBeginInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrViewConfigurationType primaryViewConfigurationType;
} XrSessionBeginInfo;
The xrEndSession function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEndSession(
XrSession session);
When the application receives XrEventDataSessionStateChanged event
with the XR_SESSION_STATE_STOPPING
state, the application should stop
its frame loop and then call xrEndSession to end the
running session.
This function signals to the runtime that the application will no longer
call xrWaitFrame, xrBeginFrame or xrEndFrame from any
thread allowing the runtime to safely transition the session to
XR_SESSION_STATE_IDLE
.
The application must also avoid reading input state or sending haptic
output after calling xrEndSession.
If the session is not running when the application
calls xrEndSession, the runtime must return error
XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_RUNNING
.
If the session is still running when the application
calls xrEndSession, but the session is not yet in the
XR_SESSION_STATE_STOPPING
state, the runtime must return error
XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_STOPPING
.
If the application wishes to exit a running session, the application can
call xrRequestExitSession so that the session transitions from
XR_SESSION_STATE_IDLE
to XR_SESSION_STATE_EXITING
.
When an application wishes to exit a running session,
it can call xrRequestExitSession, requesting that the runtime
transition through the various intermediate session states including
XR_SESSION_STATE_STOPPING
to XR_SESSION_STATE_EXITING
.
On platforms where an application’s lifecycle is managed by the system, session state changes may be implicitly triggered by application lifecycle state changes. On such platforms, using platform-specific methods to alter application lifecycle state may be the preferred method of provoking session state changes. The behavior of xrRequestExitSession is not altered, however explicit session exit may not interact with the platform-specific application lifecycle.
The xrRequestExitSession function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrRequestExitSession(
XrSession session);
If session
is not running when
xrRequestExitSession is called, XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_RUNNING
must be returned.
9.4. Session States
While events can be expanded upon, there are a minimum set of lifecycle events which can occur which all OpenXR applications must be aware of. These events are detailed below.
9.4.1. XrEventDataSessionStateChanged
The XrEventDataSessionStateChanged structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrEventDataSessionStateChanged {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSession session;
XrSessionState state;
XrTime time;
} XrEventDataSessionStateChanged;
Receiving the XrEventDataSessionStateChanged event structure indicates that the application has changed lifecycle state.
The XrSessionState enumerates the possible session lifecycle states:
typedef enum XrSessionState {
XR_SESSION_STATE_UNKNOWN = 0,
XR_SESSION_STATE_IDLE = 1,
XR_SESSION_STATE_READY = 2,
XR_SESSION_STATE_SYNCHRONIZED = 3,
XR_SESSION_STATE_VISIBLE = 4,
XR_SESSION_STATE_FOCUSED = 5,
XR_SESSION_STATE_STOPPING = 6,
XR_SESSION_STATE_LOSS_PENDING = 7,
XR_SESSION_STATE_EXITING = 8,
XR_SESSION_STATE_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrSessionState;
The XR_SESSION_STATE_UNKNOWN
state must not be returned by the
runtime, and is only defined to avoid 0
being a valid state.
Receiving the XR_SESSION_STATE_IDLE
state indicates that the runtime
considers the session is idle.
Applications in this state should minimize resource consumption but
continue to call xrPollEvent at some reasonable cadence.
Receiving the XR_SESSION_STATE_READY
state indicates that the runtime
desires the application to prepare rendering resources, begin its session
and synchronize its frame loop with the runtime.
The application does this by successfully calling
xrBeginSession and then running its frame loop by calling
xrWaitFrame, xrBeginFrame and xrEndFrame in a loop.
If the runtime wishes to return the session to the
XR_SESSION_STATE_IDLE
state, it must wait until the application calls
xrBeginSession.
After returning from the xrBeginSession call, the runtime may then
immediately transition forward through the
XR_SESSION_STATE_SYNCHRONIZED
state to the
XR_SESSION_STATE_STOPPING
state, to request that the application end
this session.
If the system supports a user engagement sensor and runtime is in
XR_SESSION_STATE_IDLE
state, the runtime may wait until the user
starts engaging with the device before transitioning to the
XR_SESSION_STATE_READY
state.
Receiving the XR_SESSION_STATE_SYNCHRONIZED
state indicates that the
application has synchronized its frame loop with the
runtime, but its frames are not visible to the user.
The application should continue running its frame loop by calling
xrWaitFrame, xrBeginFrame and xrEndFrame, although it
should avoid heavy GPU work so that other visible applications can take CPU
and GPU precedence.
The application can save resources here by skipping rendering and not
submitting any composition layers until xrWaitFrame returns an
XrFrameState with shouldRender
set to true.
A runtime may use this frame synchronization to facilitate seamless
switching from a previous XR application to this application on a frame
boundary.
Receiving the XR_SESSION_STATE_VISIBLE
state indicates that the
application has synchronized its frame loop with the
runtime, and the session’s frames will be visible to the user, but the
session is not eligible to receive XR input.
An application may be visible but not have focus, for example when the
runtime is composing a modal pop-up on top of the application’s rendered
frames.
The application should continue running its frame loop, rendering and
submitting its composition layers, although it may wish to pause its
experience, as users cannot interact with the application at this time.
It is important for applications to continue rendering when visible, even
when they do not have focus, so the user continues to see something
reasonable underneath modal pop-ups.
Runtimes should make input actions inactive while the application is
unfocused, and applications should react to an inactive input action by
skipping rendering of that action’s input avatar (depictions of hands or
other tracked objects controlled by the user).
Receiving the XR_SESSION_STATE_FOCUSED
state indicates that the
application has synchronized its frame loop with the
runtime, the session’s frames will be visible to the user, and the session
is eligible to receive XR input.
The runtime should only give one session XR input focus at any given time.
The application should be running its frame loop, rendering and submitting
composition layers, including input avatars (depictions of hands or other
tracked objects controlled by the user) for any input actions that are
active.
The runtime should avoid rendering its own input avatars when an
application is focused, unless input from a given source is being captured
by the runtime at the moment.
Receiving the XR_SESSION_STATE_STOPPING
state indicates that the
runtime has determined that the application should halt its rendering loop.
Applications should exit their rendering loop and call xrEndSession
when in this state.
A possible reason for this would be to minimize contention between multiple
applications.
If the system supports a user engagement sensor and the session is running,
the runtime may transition to the XR_SESSION_STATE_STOPPING
state
when the user stops engaging with the device.
Receiving the XR_SESSION_STATE_EXITING
state indicates the runtime
wishes the application to terminate its XR experience, typically due to a
user request via a runtime user interface.
Applications should gracefully end their process when in this state if they
do not have a non-XR user experience.
Receiving the XR_SESSION_STATE_LOSS_PENDING
state indicates the
runtime is no longer able to operate with the current session, for example
due to the loss of a display hardware connection.
An application should call xrDestroySession and may end its process
or decide to poll xrGetSystem at some reasonable cadence to get a new
XrSystemId
, and re-initialize all graphics resources related to the
new system, and then create a new session using xrCreateSession.
After the event is queued, subsequent calls to functions that accept
XrSession parameters must no longer return any success code other
than XR_SESSION_LOSS_PENDING
for the given XrSession handle.
The XR_SESSION_LOSS_PENDING
success result is returned for an
unspecified grace period of time, and the functions that return it simulate
success in their behavior.
If the runtime has no reasonable way to successfully complete a given
function (e.g. xrCreateSwapchain) when a lost session is pending, or
if the runtime is not able to provide the application a grace period, the
runtime may return XR_ERROR_SESSION_LOST
.
Thereafter, functions which accept XrSession parameters for the lost
session may return XR_ERROR_SESSION_LOST
to indicate that the
function failed and the given session was lost.
The XrSession handle and child handles are henceforth unusable and
should be destroyed by the application in order to immediately free up
resources associated with those handles.
10. Rendering
10.1. Swapchain Image Management
XR_DEFINE_HANDLE(XrSwapchain)
Normal XR applications will want to present rendered images to the user. To allow this, the runtime provides images organized in swapchains for the application to render into. The runtime must allow applications to create multiple swapchains.
Swapchain image format support by the runtime is specified by the
xrEnumerateSwapchainFormats function.
Runtimes should support R8G8B8A8
and R8G8B8A8
sRGB
formats
if possible.
Swapchain images can be 2D or 2D Array.
Rendering operations involving composition of submitted layers are assumed
to be internally performed by the runtime in linear color space.
Images submitted in sRGB color space must be created using an API-specific
sRGB format (e.g. DXGI_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_UNORM_SRGB
,
GL_SRGB8_ALPHA8
, VK_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_SRGB
) to apply automatic
sRGB-to-linear conversion when read by the runtime.
All other formats will be treated as linear values.
Note
OpenXR applications should avoid submitting linear encoded 8 bit color data
(e.g. Gritz, L. and d’Eon, E. 2007. The Importance of Being Linear. In: H. Nguyen, ed., GPU Gems 3. Addison-Wesley Professional. https://developer.nvidia.com/gpugems/gpugems3/part-iv-image-effects/chapter-24-importance-being-linear |
Note
DXGI resources will be created with their associated TYPELESS format, but the runtime will use the application-specified format for reading the data. |
The xrEnumerateSwapchainFormats function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEnumerateSwapchainFormats(
XrSession session,
uint32_t formatCapacityInput,
uint32_t* formatCountOutput,
int64_t* formats);
xrEnumerateSwapchainFormats enumerates the texture formats supported
by the current session.
The type of formats returned are dependent on the graphics API specified in
xrCreateSession.
For example, if a DirectX graphics API was specified, then the enumerated
formats correspond to the DXGI formats, such as
DXGI_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_UNORM_SRGB
.
Texture formats should be in order from highest to lowest runtime
preference.
The application should use the highest preference format that it supports
for optimal performance and quality.
With an OpenGL-based graphics API, the texture formats correspond to OpenGL internal formats.
With a Direct3D-based graphics API, xrEnumerateSwapchainFormats never
returns typeless formats (e.g. DXGI_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_TYPELESS
).
Only concrete formats are returned, and only concrete formats may be
specified by applications for swapchain creation.
Runtimes must always return identical buffer contents from this enumeration for the lifetime of the session.
The xrCreateSwapchain function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrCreateSwapchain(
XrSession session,
const XrSwapchainCreateInfo* createInfo,
XrSwapchain* swapchain);
Creates an XrSwapchain handle.
The returned swapchain handle may be subsequently used in API calls.
Multiple XrSwapchain handles may exist simultaneously, up to some
limit imposed by the runtime.
The XrSwapchain handle must be eventually freed via the
xrDestroySwapchain function.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_SWAPCHAIN_FORMAT_UNSUPPORTED
if the
image format specified in the XrSwapchainCreateInfo is unsupported.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_FEATURE_UNSUPPORTED
if any bit of
the create or usage flags specified in the XrSwapchainCreateInfo is
unsupported.
The XrSwapchainCreateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSwapchainCreateInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSwapchainCreateFlags createFlags;
XrSwapchainUsageFlags usageFlags;
int64_t format;
uint32_t sampleCount;
uint32_t width;
uint32_t height;
uint32_t faceCount;
uint32_t arraySize;
uint32_t mipCount;
} XrSwapchainCreateInfo;
The XrSwapchainCreateInfo::createFlags
member is of the
following type, and contains a bitwise-OR of zero or more of the bits
defined in XrSwapchainCreateFlagBits.
typedef XrFlags64 XrSwapchainCreateFlags;
Valid bits for XrSwapchainCreateFlags are defined by XrSwapchainCreateFlagBits, which is specified as:
// Flag bits for XrSwapchainCreateFlags
static const XrSwapchainCreateFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_CREATE_PROTECTED_CONTENT_BIT = 0x00000001;
static const XrSwapchainCreateFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_CREATE_STATIC_IMAGE_BIT = 0x00000002;
The flag bits have the following meanings:
A runtime may implement any of these, but is not required to.
A runtime must return XR_ERROR_FEATURE_UNSUPPORTED
from
xrCreateSwapchain if an XrSwapchainCreateFlags bit is requested
but not implemented.
XrSwapchainUsageFlags specify the intended usage of the swapchain
images.
The XrSwapchainCreateInfo::usageFlags
member is of this type,
and contains a bitwise-OR of one or more of the bits defined in
XrSwapchainUsageFlagBits.
typedef XrFlags64 XrSwapchainUsageFlags;
When images are created, the runtime needs to know how the images are used in a way that requires more information than simply the image format. The XrSwapchainCreateInfo passed to xrCreateSwapchain must match the intended usage.
Flags include:
// Flag bits for XrSwapchainUsageFlags
static const XrSwapchainUsageFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_COLOR_ATTACHMENT_BIT = 0x00000001;
static const XrSwapchainUsageFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_DEPTH_STENCIL_ATTACHMENT_BIT = 0x00000002;
static const XrSwapchainUsageFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_UNORDERED_ACCESS_BIT = 0x00000004;
static const XrSwapchainUsageFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_TRANSFER_SRC_BIT = 0x00000008;
static const XrSwapchainUsageFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_TRANSFER_DST_BIT = 0x00000010;
static const XrSwapchainUsageFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_SAMPLED_BIT = 0x00000020;
static const XrSwapchainUsageFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_MUTABLE_FORMAT_BIT = 0x00000040;
static const XrSwapchainUsageFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_INPUT_ATTACHMENT_BIT_MND = 0x00000080;
static const XrSwapchainUsageFlags XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_INPUT_ATTACHMENT_BIT_KHR = 0x00000080; // alias of XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_INPUT_ATTACHMENT_BIT_MND
The flag bits have the following meanings:
The number of images in each swapchain is implementation-defined except in the case of a static swapchain. To obtain the number of images actually allocated, call xrEnumerateSwapchainImages.
With a Direct3D-based graphics API, the swapchain returned by xrCreateSwapchain will be a typeless format if the requested format has a typeless analogue. Applications are required to reinterpret the swapchain as a compatible non-typeless type. Upon submitting such swapchains to the runtime, they are interpreted as the format specified by the application in the XrSwapchainCreateInfo.
Swapchains will be created with graphics API-specific flags appropriate to the type of underlying image and its usage.
Runtimes must honor underlying graphics API limits when creating resources.
xrEnumerateSwapchainFormats never returns typeless formats (e.g.
DXGI_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_TYPELESS
).
Only concrete formats are returned, and only concrete formats may be
specified by applications for swapchain creation.
The xrDestroySwapchain function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrDestroySwapchain(
XrSwapchain swapchain);
All submitted graphics API commands that refer to swapchain
must have
completed execution.
Runtimes may continue to utilize swapchain images after
xrDestroySwapchain is called.
Swapchain images are acquired, waited on, and released by index, but the number of images in a swapchain is implementation-defined. Additionally, rendering to images requires access to the underlying image primitive of the graphics API being used. Applications may query and cache the images at any time after swapchain creation.
The xrEnumerateSwapchainImages function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEnumerateSwapchainImages(
XrSwapchain swapchain,
uint32_t imageCapacityInput,
uint32_t* imageCountOutput,
XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader* images);
Fills an array of graphics API-specific XrSwapchainImage
structures.
The resources must be constant and valid for the lifetime of the
XrSwapchain.
Runtimes must always return identical buffer contents from this enumeration for the lifetime of the swapchain.
Note: images
is a pointer to an array of structures of graphics
API-specific type, not an array of structure pointers.
The pointer submitted as images
will be treated as an array of the
expected graphics API-specific type based on the graphics API used at
session creation time.
If the type
member of any array element accessed in this way does not
match the expected value, the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
.
Note
Under a typical memory model, a runtime must treat the supplied pointer as
an opaque blob beginning with XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader, until after
it has verified the XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader:: |
The XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
} XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader;
The XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader is a base structure that is extended by
graphics API-specific XrSwapchainImage*
child structures.
Before an application builds graphics API command buffers that refer to an image in a swapchain, it must acquire the image from the swapchain. The acquire operation determines the index of the next image to be used in the swapchain. The order in which images are acquired is undefined. The runtime must allow the application to acquire more than one image from a single (non-static) swapchain at a time, for example if the application implements a multiple frame deep rendering pipeline.
The xrAcquireSwapchainImage function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrAcquireSwapchainImage(
XrSwapchain swapchain,
const XrSwapchainImageAcquireInfo* acquireInfo,
uint32_t* index);
Acquires the image corresponding to the index
position in the array
returned by xrEnumerateSwapchainImages.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_CALL_ORDER_INVALID
if the next
available index has already been acquired and not yet released with
xrReleaseSwapchainImage.
If the swapchain
was created with the
XR_SWAPCHAIN_CREATE_STATIC_IMAGE_BIT
set in
XrSwapchainCreateInfo::createFlags
, this function must not have
been previously called for this swapchain.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_CALL_ORDER_INVALID
if a
swapchain
created with the XR_SWAPCHAIN_CREATE_STATIC_IMAGE_BIT
set in XrSwapchainCreateInfo::createFlags
and this function has
been successfully called previously for this swapchain.
This function only provides the index of the swapchain image, for example for use in recording command buffers. It does not wait for the image to be usable by the application. The application must call xrWaitSwapchainImage for each "acquire" call before submitting graphics commands that write to the image.
The XrSwapchainImageAcquireInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageAcquireInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
} XrSwapchainImageAcquireInfo;
Because this structure only exists to support extension-specific structures,
xrAcquireSwapchainImage will accept a NULL
argument for
xrAcquireSwapchainImage::acquireInfo
for applications that are
not using any relevant extensions.
The xrWaitSwapchainImage function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrWaitSwapchainImage(
XrSwapchain swapchain,
const XrSwapchainImageWaitInfo* waitInfo);
Before an application begins writing to a swapchain image, it must first wait on the image, to avoid writing to it before the compositor has finished reading from it. xrWaitSwapchainImage will implicitly wait on the oldest acquired swapchain image which has not yet been successfully waited on. Once a swapchain image has been successfully waited on without timeout, the app must release before waiting on the next acquired swapchain image.
This function may block for longer than the timeout specified in XrSwapchainImageWaitInfo due to scheduling or contention.
If the timeout expires without the image becoming available for writing,
XR_TIMEOUT_EXPIRED
must be returned.
If xrWaitSwapchainImage returns XR_TIMEOUT_EXPIRED
, the next
call to xrWaitSwapchainImage will wait on the same image index again
until the function succeeds with XR_SUCCESS
.
Note that this is not an error code;
XR_SUCCEEDED(
is XR_TIMEOUT_EXPIRED
)true
.
The runtime must eventually relinquish ownership of a swapchain image to the application and must not block indefinitely.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_CALL_ORDER_INVALID
if no image has
been acquired by calling xrAcquireSwapchainImage.
The XrSwapchainImageWaitInfo structure describes a swapchain image wait operation. It is defined as:
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageWaitInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrDuration timeout;
} XrSwapchainImageWaitInfo;
Once an application is done submitting commands that reference the swapchain image, the application must release the swapchain image. xrReleaseSwapchainImage will implicitly release the oldest swapchain image which has been acquired. The swapchain image must have been successfully waited on without timeout before it is released. xrEndFrame will use the most recently released swapchain image. In each frame submitted to the compositor, only one image index from each swapchain will be used. Note that in case the swapchain contains 2D image arrays, one array is referenced per swapchain index and thus the whole image array may be used in one frame.
The xrReleaseSwapchainImage function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrReleaseSwapchainImage(
XrSwapchain swapchain,
const XrSwapchainImageReleaseInfo* releaseInfo);
If the swapchain
was created with the
XR_SWAPCHAIN_CREATE_STATIC_IMAGE_BIT
set in
XrSwapchainCreateInfo::createFlags
structure, this function
must not have been previously called for this swapchain.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_CALL_ORDER_INVALID
if no image has
been waited on by calling xrWaitSwapchainImage.
The XrSwapchainImageReleaseInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageReleaseInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
} XrSwapchainImageReleaseInfo;
Because this structure only exists to support extension-specific structures,
xrReleaseSwapchainImage will accept a NULL
argument for
xrReleaseSwapchainImage::releaseInfo
for applications that are
not using any relevant extensions.
10.2. View and Projection State
An application uses xrLocateViews to retrieve the viewer pose and projection parameters needed to render each view for use in a composition projection layer.
The xrLocateViews function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrLocateViews(
XrSession session,
const XrViewLocateInfo* viewLocateInfo,
XrViewState* viewState,
uint32_t viewCapacityInput,
uint32_t* viewCountOutput,
XrView* views);
The xrLocateViews function returns the view and projection info for a particular display time. This time is typically the target display time for a given frame. Repeatedly calling xrLocateViews with the same time may not necessarily return the same result. Instead the prediction gets increasingly accurate as the function is called closer to the given time for which a prediction is made. This allows an application to get the predicted views as late as possible in its pipeline to get the least amount of latency and prediction error.
xrLocateViews returns an array of XrView elements, one for each view of the specified view configuration type, along with an XrViewState containing additional state data shared across all views. The eye each view corresponds to is statically defined in XrViewConfigurationType in case the application wants to apply eye-specific rendering traits. The XrViewState and XrView member data may change on subsequent calls to xrLocateViews, and so applications must not assume it to be constant.
If an application gives a viewLocateInfo
with a
XrViewLocateInfo::viewConfigurationType
that was not passed in
the session’s call to xrBeginSession via the
XrSessionBeginInfo::primaryViewConfigurationType
, or enabled
though an extension, then the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
.
The XrViewLocateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrViewLocateInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrViewConfigurationType viewConfigurationType;
XrTime displayTime;
XrSpace space;
} XrViewLocateInfo;
The XrViewLocateInfo structure contains the display time and space used to locate the view XrView structures.
The runtime must return error
XR_ERROR_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_TYPE_UNSUPPORTED
if the given
viewConfigurationType
is not one of the supported type reported by
xrEnumerateViewConfigurations.
The XrViewState structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrViewState {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrViewStateFlags viewStateFlags;
} XrViewState;
The XrViewState contains additional view state from xrLocateViews common to all views of the active view configuration.
The XrViewStateFlags specifies the validity and quality of the
corresponding XrView array returned by xrLocateViews.
The XrViewState::viewStateFlags
member is of this type, and
contains a bitwise-OR of zero or more of the bits defined in
XrViewStateFlagBits.
typedef XrFlags64 XrViewStateFlags;
Valid bits for XrViewStateFlags are defined by XrViewStateFlagBits, which is specified as:
// Flag bits for XrViewStateFlags
static const XrViewStateFlags XR_VIEW_STATE_ORIENTATION_VALID_BIT = 0x00000001;
static const XrViewStateFlags XR_VIEW_STATE_POSITION_VALID_BIT = 0x00000002;
static const XrViewStateFlags XR_VIEW_STATE_ORIENTATION_TRACKED_BIT = 0x00000004;
static const XrViewStateFlags XR_VIEW_STATE_POSITION_TRACKED_BIT = 0x00000008;
The flag bits have the following meanings:
10.3. Frame Synchronization
An application synchronizes its rendering loop to the runtime by calling xrWaitFrame.
The xrWaitFrame function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrWaitFrame(
XrSession session,
const XrFrameWaitInfo* frameWaitInfo,
XrFrameState* frameState);
xrWaitFrame throttles the application frame loop in order to synchronize application frame submissions with the display. xrWaitFrame returns a predicted display time for the next time that the runtime predicts a composited frame will be displayed. The runtime may affect this computation by changing the return values and throttling of xrWaitFrame in response to feedback from frame submission and completion times in xrEndFrame. A subsequent xrWaitFrame call must block until the previous frame has been begun with xrBeginFrame and must unblock independently of the corresponding call to xrEndFrame. Refer to xrBeginSession for details on how a transition to session running resets the frame function call order.
When less than one frame interval has passed since the previous return from xrWaitFrame, the runtime should block until the beginning of the next frame interval. If more than one frame interval has passed since the last return from xrWaitFrame, the runtime may return immediately or block until the beginning of the next frame interval.
In the case that an application has pipelined frame submissions, the application should compute the appropriate target display time using both the predicted display time and predicted display interval. The application should use the computed target display time when requesting space and view locations for rendering.
The XrFrameState::predictedDisplayTime
returned by
xrWaitFrame must be monotonically increasing.
The runtime may dynamically adjust the start time of the frame interval relative to the display hardware’s refresh cycle to minimize graphics processor contention between the application and the compositor.
xrWaitFrame must be callable from any thread, including a different thread than xrBeginFrame/xrEndFrame are being called from.
Calling xrWaitFrame must be externally synchronized by the application, concurrent calls may result in undefined behavior.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_RUNNING
if the
session
is not running.
Note
The engine simulation should advance based on the display time. Every stage in the engine pipeline should use the exact same display time for one particular application-generated frame. An accurate and consistent display time across all stages and threads in the engine pipeline is important to avoid object motion judder. If the application has multiple pipeline stages, the application should pass its computed display time through its pipeline, as xrWaitFrame must be called only once per frame. |
The XrFrameWaitInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrFrameWaitInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
} XrFrameWaitInfo;
Because this structure only exists to support extension-specific structures,
xrWaitFrame must accept a NULL
argument for
xrWaitFrame::frameWaitInfo
for applications that are not using
any relevant extensions.
The XrFrameState structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrFrameState {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrTime predictedDisplayTime;
XrDuration predictedDisplayPeriod;
XrBool32 shouldRender;
} XrFrameState;
XrFrameState describes the time at which the next frame will be
displayed to the user.
predictedDisplayTime
must refer to the midpoint of the interval
during which the frame is displayed.
The runtime may report a different predictedDisplayPeriod
from the
hardware’s refresh cycle.
For any frame where shouldRender
is XR_FALSE
, the application
should avoid heavy GPU work for that frame, for example by not rendering
its layers.
This typically happens when the application is transitioning into or out of
a running session, or when some system UI is fully covering the application
at the moment.
As long as the session is running, the application
should keep running the frame loop to maintain the frame synchronization to
the runtime, even if this requires calling xrEndFrame with all layers
omitted.
10.4. Frame Submission
Every application must call xrBeginFrame before calling
xrEndFrame, and should call xrEndFrame before calling
xrBeginFrame again.
Calling xrEndFrame again without a prior call to xrBeginFrame
must result in XR_ERROR_CALL_ORDER_INVALID
being returned by
xrEndFrame.
An application may call xrBeginFrame again if the prior
xrEndFrame fails or if the application wishes to discard an
in-progress frame.
A successful call to xrBeginFrame again with no intervening
xrEndFrame call must result in the success code
XR_FRAME_DISCARDED
being returned from xrBeginFrame.
In this case it is assumed that the xrBeginFrame refers to the next
frame and the previously begun frame is forfeited by the application.
An application may call xrEndFrame without having called
xrReleaseSwapchainImage since the previous call to xrEndFrame
for any swapchain passed to xrEndFrame.
Applications should call xrBeginFrame right before executing any
graphics device work for a given frame, as opposed to calling it afterwards.
The runtime must only compose frames whose xrBeginFrame and
xrEndFrame both return success codes.
While xrBeginFrame and xrEndFrame do not need to be called on
the same thread, the application must handle synchronization if they are
called on separate threads.
The xrBeginFrame function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrBeginFrame(
XrSession session,
const XrFrameBeginInfo* frameBeginInfo);
xrBeginFrame is called prior to the start of frame rendering.
The application should still call xrBeginFrame but omit rendering
work for the frame if XrFrameState::shouldRender
is
XR_FALSE
.
Runtimes must not perform frame synchronization or throttling through the xrBeginFrame function and should instead do so through xrWaitFrame.
The runtime must return the error code XR_ERROR_CALL_ORDER_INVALID
if
there was no corresponding successful call to xrWaitFrame.
The runtime must return the success code XR_FRAME_DISCARDED
if a
prior xrBeginFrame has been called without an intervening call to
xrEndFrame.
Refer to xrBeginSession for details on how a transition to
session running resets the frame function call order.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_RUNNING
if the
session
is not running.
The XrFrameBeginInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrFrameBeginInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
} XrFrameBeginInfo;
Because this structure only exists to support extension-specific structures,
xrBeginFrame will accept a NULL
argument for
xrBeginFrame::frameBeginInfo
for applications that are not using
any relevant extensions.
The xrEndFrame function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEndFrame(
XrSession session,
const XrFrameEndInfo* frameEndInfo);
xrEndFrame may return immediately to the application.
XrFrameEndInfo::displayTime
should be computed using values
returned by xrWaitFrame.
The runtime should be robust against variations in the timing of calls to
xrWaitFrame, since a pipelined system may call xrWaitFrame on a
separate thread from xrBeginFrame and xrEndFrame without any
synchronization guarantees.
Note
An accurate predicted display time is very important to avoid black pull-in by reprojection and to reduce motion judder in case the runtime does not implement a translational reprojection. Reprojection should never display images before the display refresh period they were predicted for, even if they are completed early, because this will cause motion judder just the same. In other words, the better the predicted display time, the less latency experienced by the user. |
Every call to xrEndFrame must be preceded by a successful call to
xrBeginFrame.
Failure to do so must result in XR_ERROR_CALL_ORDER_INVALID
being
returned by xrEndFrame.
Refer to xrBeginSession for details on how a transition to
session running resets the frame function call order.
XrFrameEndInfo may reference swapchains into which the application
has rendered for this frame.
From each XrSwapchain only one image index is implicitly referenced
per frame, the one corresponding to the last call to
xrReleaseSwapchainImage.
However, a specific swapchain (and by extension a specific swapchain image
index) may be referenced in XrFrameEndInfo multiple times.
This can be used for example to render a side by side image into a single
swapchain image and referencing it twice with differing image rectangles in
different layers.
If no layers are provided then the display must be cleared.
XR_ERROR_LAYER_INVALID
must be returned if an unknown, unsupported
layer type, or NULL
pointer is passed as one of the
XrFrameEndInfo::layers.
XR_ERROR_LAYER_INVALID
must be returned if a layer references a
swapchain that has no released swapchain image.
XR_ERROR_LAYER_LIMIT_EXCEEDED
must be returned if
XrFrameEndInfo::layerCount exceeds
XrSystemGraphicsProperties::maxLayerCount or if the runtime is unable
to composite the specified layers due to resource constraints.
XR_ERROR_SWAPCHAIN_RECT_INVALID
must be returned if
XrFrameEndInfo::layers contains a composition layer which references
pixels outside of the associated swapchain image or if negatively sized.
XR_ERROR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_UNSUPPORTED
must be returned if
XrFrameEndInfo::environmentBlendMode is not supported.
XR_ERROR_SESSION_NOT_RUNNING
must be returned if the session
is not running.
Note
Applications should discard frames for which xrEndFrame returns a recoverable error over attempting to resubmit the frame with different frame parameters to provide a more consistent experience across different runtime implementations. |
The XrFrameEndInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrFrameEndInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrTime displayTime;
XrEnvironmentBlendMode environmentBlendMode;
uint32_t layerCount;
const XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader* const* layers;
} XrFrameEndInfo;
All layers submitted to xrEndFrame will be presented to the primary view configuration of the running session.
10.5. Frame Rate
For every application-generated frame, the application may call xrEndFrame to submit the application-generated composition layers. In addition, the application must call xrWaitFrame when the application is ready to begin preparing the next set of frame layers. xrEndFrame may return immediately to the application, but xrWaitFrame must block for an amount of time that depends on throttling of the application by the runtime. The earliest the runtime will return from xrWaitFrame is when it determines that the application should start drawing the next frame.
10.6. Compositing
Composition layers are submitted by the application via the xrEndFrame
call.
All composition layers to be drawn must be submitted with every
xrEndFrame call.
A layer that is omitted in this call will not be drawn by the runtime layer
compositor.
All views associated with projection layers must be supplied, or
XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
must be returned by xrEndFrame.
Composition layers must be drawn in the same order as they are specified in via XrFrameEndInfo, with the 0th layer drawn first. Layers must be drawn with a "painter’s algorithm," with each successive layer potentially overwriting the destination layers whether or not the new layers are virtually closer to the viewer.
10.6.1. Composition Layer Flags
XrCompositionLayerFlags specifies options for individual composition layers, and contains a bitwise-OR of zero or more of the bits defined in XrCompositionLayerFlagBits.
typedef XrFlags64 XrCompositionLayerFlags;
Valid bits for XrCompositionLayerFlags are defined by XrCompositionLayerFlagBits, which is specified as:
// Flag bits for XrCompositionLayerFlags
static const XrCompositionLayerFlags XR_COMPOSITION_LAYER_CORRECT_CHROMATIC_ABERRATION_BIT = 0x00000001;
static const XrCompositionLayerFlags XR_COMPOSITION_LAYER_BLEND_TEXTURE_SOURCE_ALPHA_BIT = 0x00000002;
static const XrCompositionLayerFlags XR_COMPOSITION_LAYER_UNPREMULTIPLIED_ALPHA_BIT = 0x00000004;
The flag bits have the following meanings:
10.6.2. Composition Layer Blending
All types of composition layers are subject to blending with other layers.
Blending of layers can be controlled by layer per-texel source alpha.
Layer swapchain textures may contain an alpha channel, depending on the
image format.
If a submitted swapchain’s texture format does not include an alpha channel
or if the XR_COMPOSITION_LAYER_BLEND_TEXTURE_SOURCE_ALPHA_BIT
is
unset, then the layer alpha is initialized to one.
If the swapchain texture format color encoding is other than RGBA, it is converted to RGBA.
If the texture color channels are encoded without premultiplying by alpha,
the XR_COMPOSITION_LAYER_UNPREMULTIPLIED_ALPHA_BIT
should be set.
The effect of this bit alters the layer color as follows:
LayerColor.RGB *= LayerColor.A
LayerColor is then clamped to a range of [0.0, 1.0].
The layer blending operation is defined as:
CompositeColor = LayerColor + CompositeColor * (1 - LayerColor.A)
Before the first layer is composited, all components of CompositeColor are initialized to zero.
10.6.3. Composition Layer Types
Composition layers allow an application to offload the composition of the final image to a runtime-supplied compositor. This reduces the application’s rendering complexity since details such as frame-rate interpolation and distortion correction can be performed by the runtime. The core specification defines XrCompositionLayerProjection and XrCompositionLayerQuad layer types.
The projection layer type represents planar projected images rendered from the eye point of each eye using a perspective projection. This layer type is typically used to render the virtual world from the user’s perspective.
The quad layer type describes a posable planar rectangle in the virtual world for displaying two-dimensional content. Quad layers can subtend a smaller portion of the display’s field of view, allowing a better match between the resolutions of the XrSwapchain image and footprint of that image in the final composition. This improves legibility for user interface elements or heads-up displays and allows optimal sampling during any composition distortion corrections the runtime might employ.
The classes below describe the layer types in the layer composition system.
The XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrCompositionLayerFlags layerFlags;
XrSpace space;
} XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader;
All composition layer structures begin with the elements described in the XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader. The XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader structure is not intended to be directly used, but forms a basis for defining current and future structures containing composition layer information. The XrFrameEndInfo structure contains an array of pointers to these polymorphic header structures. All composition layer type pointers must be type-castable as an XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader pointer.
Many composition layer structures also contain one or more references to generic layer data stored in an XrSwapchainSubImage structure.
The XrSwapchainSubImage structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSwapchainSubImage {
XrSwapchain swapchain;
XrRect2Di imageRect;
uint32_t imageArrayIndex;
} XrSwapchainSubImage;
Runtimes must return XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
if the
XrSwapchainSubImage::imageArrayIndex
is equal to or greater than
the XrSwapchainCreateInfo::arraySize
that the
XrSwapchainSubImage::swapchain
was created with.
Projection Composition
The XrCompositionLayerProjection layer represents planar projected images rendered from the eye point of each eye using a standard perspective projection.
The XrCompositionLayerProjection structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerProjection {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrCompositionLayerFlags layerFlags;
XrSpace space;
uint32_t viewCount;
const XrCompositionLayerProjectionView* views;
} XrCompositionLayerProjection;
Note
Because a runtime may reproject the layer over time, a projection layer
should specify an XrSpace in which to maximize stability of the layer
content.
For example, a projection layer containing world-locked content should use
an XrSpace which is also world-locked, such as the |
The XrCompositionLayerProjectionView structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerProjectionView {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrPosef pose;
XrFovf fov;
XrSwapchainSubImage subImage;
} XrCompositionLayerProjectionView;
The count and order of view poses submitted with
XrCompositionLayerProjection must be the same order as that returned
by xrLocateViews.
The XrCompositionLayerProjectionView::pose
and
XrCompositionLayerProjectionView::fov
should almost always
derive from XrView::pose
and XrView::fov
as found in
the xrLocateViews::views
array.
However, applications may submit an XrCompositionLayerProjectionView
which has a different view or FOV than that from xrLocateViews.
In this case, the runtime will map the view and FOV to the system display
appropriately.
In the case that two submitted views within a single layer overlap, they
must be composited in view array order.
Quad Layer Composition
The XrCompositionLayerQuad structure defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerQuad {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrCompositionLayerFlags layerFlags;
XrSpace space;
XrEyeVisibility eyeVisibility;
XrSwapchainSubImage subImage;
XrPosef pose;
XrExtent2Df size;
} XrCompositionLayerQuad;
The XrCompositionLayerQuad layer is useful for user interface elements or 2D content rendered into the virtual world. The layer’s XrSwapchainSubImage::swapchain image is applied to a quad in the virtual world space. Only front face of the quad surface is visible; the back face is not visible and must not be drawn by the runtime. A quad layer has no thickness; it is a two-dimensional object positioned and oriented in 3D space. The position of a quad refers to the center of the quad within the given XrSpace. The orientation of the quad refers to the orientation of the normal vector from the front face. The size of a quad refers to the quad’s size in the x-y plane of the given XrSpace’s coordinate system. A quad with a position of {0,0,0}, rotation of {0,0,0,1} (no rotation), and a size of {1,1} refers to a 1 meter x 1 meter quad centered at {0,0,0} with its front face normal vector coinciding with the +z axis.
The XrEyeVisibility enum selects which of the viewer’s eyes to display a layer to:
typedef enum XrEyeVisibility {
XR_EYE_VISIBILITY_BOTH = 0,
XR_EYE_VISIBILITY_LEFT = 1,
XR_EYE_VISIBILITY_RIGHT = 2,
XR_EYE_VISIBILITY_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrEyeVisibility;
10.6.4. Environment Blend Mode
After the compositor has blended and flattened all layers (including any
layers added by the runtime itself), it will then present this image to the
system’s display.
The composited image will then blend with the user’s view of the physical
world behind the displays in one of three modes, based on the application’s
chosen environment blend mode.
VR applications will generally choose the
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_OPAQUE
blend mode, while AR applications
will generally choose either the XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ADDITIVE
or
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ALPHA_BLEND
mode.
Applications select their environment blend mode each frame as part of their
call to xrEndFrame.
The application can inspect the set of supported environment blend modes for
a given system using xrEnumerateEnvironmentBlendModes, and prepare
their assets and rendering techniques differently based on the blend mode
they choose.
For example, a black shadow rendered using the
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ADDITIVE
blend mode will appear transparent,
and so an application in that mode may render a glow as a grounding effect
around the black shadow to ensure the shadow can be seen.
Similarly, an application designed for
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_OPAQUE
or
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ADDITIVE
rendering may choose to leave
garbage in their alpha channel as a side effect of a rendering optimization,
but this garbage would appear as visible display artifacts if the
environment blend mode was instead
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ALPHA_BLEND
.
Not all systems will support all environment blend modes.
For example, a VR headset may not support the
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ADDITIVE
or
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ALPHA_BLEND
modes unless it has video
passthrough, while an AR headset with an additive display may not support
the XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_OPAQUE
or
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ALPHA_BLEND
modes.
For devices that can support multiple environment blend modes, such as AR
phones with video passthrough, the runtime may optimize power consumption
on the device in response to the environment blend mode that the application
chooses each frame.
For example, if an application on a video passthrough phone knows that it is
currently rendering a 360-degree background covering all screen pixels, it
can submit frames with an environment blend mode of
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_OPAQUE
, saving the runtime the cost of
compositing a camera-based underlay of the physical world behind the
application’s layers.
The xrEnumerateEnvironmentBlendModes function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEnumerateEnvironmentBlendModes(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrViewConfigurationType viewConfigurationType,
uint32_t environmentBlendModeCapacityInput,
uint32_t* environmentBlendModeCountOutput,
XrEnvironmentBlendMode* environmentBlendModes);
Enumerates the set of environment blend modes that this runtime supports for a given view configuration of the system. Environment blend modes should be in order from highest to lowest runtime preference.
Runtimes must always return identical buffer contents from this enumeration
for the given systemId
and viewConfigurationType
for the
lifetime of the instance.
The possible blend modes are specified by the XrEnvironmentBlendMode enumeration:
typedef enum XrEnvironmentBlendMode {
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_OPAQUE = 1,
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ADDITIVE = 2,
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_ALPHA_BLEND = 3,
XR_ENVIRONMENT_BLEND_MODE_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrEnvironmentBlendMode;
11. Input and Haptics
11.1. Action Overview
OpenXR applications communicate with input devices using XrActions.
Actions are created at initialization time and later used to request input
device state, create action spaces, or control haptic events.
Input action handles represent 'actions' that the application is interested
in obtaining the state of, not direct input device hardware.
For example, instead of the application directly querying the state of the A
button when interacting with a menu, an OpenXR application instead creates a
menu_select
action at startup then asks OpenXR for the state of
the action.
The application recommends that the action be assigned to a specific input source on the input device for a known interaction profile, but runtimes have the ability to choose a different control depending on user preference, input device availability, or any other reason. This abstraction ensures that applications can run on a wide variety of input hardware and maximize user accessibility.
Example usage:
XrInstance instance; // previously initialized
XrSession session; // previously initialized
// Create an action set
XrActionSetCreateInfo actionSetInfo{XR_TYPE_ACTION_SET_CREATE_INFO};
strcpy(actionSetInfo.actionSetName, "gameplay");
strcpy(actionSetInfo.localizedActionSetName, "Gameplay");
actionSetInfo.priority = 0;
XrActionSet inGameActionSet;
CHK_XR(xrCreateActionSet(instance, &actionSetInfo, &inGameActionSet));
// create a "teleport" input action
XrActionCreateInfo actioninfo{XR_TYPE_ACTION_CREATE_INFO};
strcpy(actioninfo.actionName, "teleport");
actioninfo.actionType = XR_ACTION_TYPE_BOOLEAN_INPUT;
strcpy(actioninfo.localizedActionName, "Teleport");
XrAction teleportAction;
CHK_XR(xrCreateAction(inGameActionSet, &actioninfo, &teleportAction));
// create a "player_hit" output action
XrActionCreateInfo hapticsactioninfo{XR_TYPE_ACTION_CREATE_INFO};
strcpy(hapticsactioninfo.actionName, "player_hit");
hapticsactioninfo.actionType = XR_ACTION_TYPE_VIBRATION_OUTPUT;
strcpy(hapticsactioninfo.localizedActionName, "Player hit");
XrAction hapticsAction;
CHK_XR(xrCreateAction(inGameActionSet, &hapticsactioninfo, &hapticsAction));
XrPath triggerClickPath, hapticPath;
CHK_XR(xrStringToPath(instance, "/user/hand/right/input/trigger/click", &triggerClickPath));
CHK_XR(xrStringToPath(instance, "/user/hand/right/output/haptic", &hapticPath))
XrPath interactionProfilePath;
CHK_XR(xrStringToPath(instance, "/interaction_profiles/vendor_x/profile_x", &interactionProfilePath));
XrActionSuggestedBinding bindings[2];
bindings[0].action = teleportAction;
bindings[0].binding = triggerClickPath;
bindings[1].action = hapticsAction;
bindings[1].binding = hapticPath;
XrInteractionProfileSuggestedBinding suggestedBindings{XR_TYPE_INTERACTION_PROFILE_SUGGESTED_BINDING};
suggestedBindings.interactionProfile = interactionProfilePath;
suggestedBindings.suggestedBindings = bindings;
suggestedBindings.countSuggestedBindings = 2;
CHK_XR(xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings(instance, &suggestedBindings));
XrSessionActionSetsAttachInfo attachInfo{XR_TYPE_SESSION_ACTION_SETS_ATTACH_INFO};
attachInfo.countActionSets = 1;
attachInfo.actionSets = &inGameActionSet;
CHK_XR(xrAttachSessionActionSets(session, &attachInfo));
// application main loop
while (1)
{
// sync action data
XrActiveActionSet activeActionSet{inGameActionSet, XR_NULL_PATH};
XrActionsSyncInfo syncInfo{XR_TYPE_ACTIONS_SYNC_INFO};
syncInfo.countActiveActionSets = 1;
syncInfo.activeActionSets = &activeActionSet;
CHK_XR(xrSyncActions(session, &syncInfo));
// query input action state
XrActionStateBoolean teleportState{XR_TYPE_ACTION_STATE_BOOLEAN};
XrActionStateGetInfo getInfo{XR_TYPE_ACTION_STATE_GET_INFO};
getInfo.action = teleportAction;
CHK_XR(xrGetActionStateBoolean(session, &getInfo, &teleportState));
if (teleportState.changedSinceLastSync && teleportState.currentState)
{
// fire haptics using output action
XrHapticVibration vibration{XR_TYPE_HAPTIC_VIBRATION};
vibration.amplitude = 0.5;
vibration.duration = 300;
vibration.frequency = 3000;
XrHapticActionInfo hapticActionInfo{XR_TYPE_HAPTIC_ACTION_INFO};
hapticActionInfo.action = hapticsAction;
CHK_XR(xrApplyHapticFeedback(session, &hapticActionInfo, (const XrHapticBaseHeader*)&vibration));
}
}
11.2. Action Sets
XR_DEFINE_HANDLE(XrActionSet)
Action sets are application-defined collections of actions. They are attached to a given XrSession with a xrAttachSessionActionSets call. They are enabled or disabled by the application via xrSyncActions depending on the current application context. For example, a game may have one set of actions that apply to controlling a character and another set for navigating a menu system. When these actions are grouped into two XrActionSet handles they can be selectively enabled and disabled using a single function call.
Actions are passed a handle to their XrActionSet when they are created.
Action sets are created by calling xrCreateActionSet:
The xrCreateActionSet function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrCreateActionSet(
XrInstance instance,
const XrActionSetCreateInfo* createInfo,
XrActionSet* actionSet);
The xrCreateActionSet function creates an action set and returns a handle to the created action set.
The XrActionSetCreateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionSetCreateInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
char actionSetName[XR_MAX_ACTION_SET_NAME_SIZE];
char localizedActionSetName[XR_MAX_LOCALIZED_ACTION_SET_NAME_SIZE];
uint32_t priority;
} XrActionSetCreateInfo;
When multiple actions are bound to the same input source, the priority
of each action set determines which bindings are suppressed.
Runtimes must ignore input sources from action sets with a lower priority
number if those specific input sources are also present in active actions
within a higher priority action set.
If multiple action sets with the same priority are bound to the same input
source and that is the highest priority number, runtimes must process all
those bindings at the same time.
Two actions are considered to be bound to the same input source if they use the same identifier and optional location path segments, even if they have different component segments.
When runtimes are ignoring bindings because of priority, they must treat
the binding to that input source as though they do not exist.
That means the isActive
field must be XR_FALSE
when retrieving
action data, and that the runtime must not provide any visual, haptic, or
other feedback related to the binding of that action to that input source.
Other actions in the same action set which are bound to input sources that
do not collide are not affected and are processed as normal.
If actionSetName
or localizedActionSetName
are empty strings,
the runtime must return XR_ERROR_NAME_INVALID
or
XR_ERROR_LOCALIZED_NAME_INVALID
respectively.
If actionSetName
or localizedActionSetName
are duplicates of the
corresponding field for any existing action set in the specified instance,
the runtime must return XR_ERROR_NAME_DUPLICATED
or
XR_ERROR_LOCALIZED_NAME_DUPLICATED
respectively.
If the conflicting action set is destroyed, the conflicting field is no
longer considered duplicated.
If actionSetName
contains characters which are not allowed in a single
level of a well-formed path string, the
runtime must return XR_ERROR_PATH_FORMAT_INVALID
.
The xrDestroyActionSet function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrDestroyActionSet(
XrActionSet actionSet);
Action set handles can be destroyed by calling xrDestroyActionSet. When an action set handle is destroyed, all handles of actions in that action set are also destroyed.
The implementation must not free underlying resources for the action set while there are other valid handles that refer to those resources. The implementation may release resources for an action set when all of the action spaces for actions in that action set have been destroyed. See Action Spaces Lifetime for details.
Resources for all action sets in an instance must be freed when the instance containing those actions sets is destroyed.
11.3. Creating Actions
XR_DEFINE_HANDLE(XrAction)
Action handles are used to refer to individual actions when retrieving action data, creating action spaces, or sending haptic events.
The xrCreateAction function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrCreateAction(
XrActionSet actionSet,
const XrActionCreateInfo* createInfo,
XrAction* action);
xrCreateAction creates an action and returns its handle.
If actionSet
has been included in a call to
xrAttachSessionActionSets, the implementation must return
XR_ERROR_ACTIONSETS_ALREADY_ATTACHED
.
The XrActionCreateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionCreateInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
char actionName[XR_MAX_ACTION_NAME_SIZE];
XrActionType actionType;
uint32_t countSubactionPaths;
const XrPath* subactionPaths;
char localizedActionName[XR_MAX_LOCALIZED_ACTION_NAME_SIZE];
} XrActionCreateInfo;
Subaction paths are a mechanism that enables applications to use the same
action name and handle on multiple devices.
Applications can query action state using subaction paths that differentiate
data coming from each device.
This allows the runtime to group logically equivalent actions together in
system UI.
For instance, an application could create a single pick_up
action
with the /user/hand/left and /user/hand/right subaction
paths and use the subaction paths to independently query the state of
pick_up_with_left_hand
and pick_up_with_right_hand
.
Applications can create actions with or without the subactionPaths
set to a list of paths.
If this list of paths is omitted (i.e. subactionPaths
is set to
NULL
, and countSubactionPaths
is set to 0
), the application is
opting out of filtering action results by subaction paths and any call to
get action data must also omit subaction paths.
If subactionPaths
is specified and any of the following conditions are
not satisfied, the runtime must return XR_ERROR_PATH_UNSUPPORTED
:
-
Each path provided is one of:
-
/user/head
-
/user/hand/left
-
/user/hand/right
-
/user/gamepad
-
-
No path appears in the list more than once
Extensions may append additional top level user paths to the above list.
Note
Earlier revisions of the spec mentioned /user but it could not be implemented as specified and was removed as errata. |
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_PATH_UNSUPPORTED
in the following
circumstances:
-
The application specified subaction paths at action creation and the application called
xrGetActionState*
or a haptic function with an empty subaction path array. -
The application called
xrGetActionState*
or a haptic function with a subaction path that was not specified when the action was created.
If actionName
or localizedActionName
are empty strings, the
runtime must return XR_ERROR_NAME_INVALID
or
XR_ERROR_LOCALIZED_NAME_INVALID
respectively.
If actionName
or localizedActionName
are duplicates of the
corresponding field for any existing action in the specified action set, the
runtime must return XR_ERROR_NAME_DUPLICATED
or
XR_ERROR_LOCALIZED_NAME_DUPLICATED
respectively.
If the conflicting action is destroyed, the conflicting field is no longer
considered duplicated.
If actionName
contains characters which are not allowed in a single
level of a well-formed path string, the
runtime must return XR_ERROR_PATH_FORMAT_INVALID
.
The XrActionType parameter takes one of the following values:
typedef enum XrActionType {
XR_ACTION_TYPE_BOOLEAN_INPUT = 1,
XR_ACTION_TYPE_FLOAT_INPUT = 2,
XR_ACTION_TYPE_VECTOR2F_INPUT = 3,
XR_ACTION_TYPE_POSE_INPUT = 4,
XR_ACTION_TYPE_VIBRATION_OUTPUT = 100,
XR_ACTION_TYPE_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrActionType;
The xrDestroyAction function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrDestroyAction(
XrAction action);
Action handles can be destroyed by calling xrDestroyAction. Handles for actions that are part of an action set are automatically destroyed when the action set’s handle is destroyed.
The implementation must not destroy the underlying resources for an action when xrDestroyAction is called. Those resources are still used to make action spaces locatable and when processing action priority in xrSyncActions. Destroying the action handle removes the application’s access to these resources, but has no other change on actions.
Resources for all actions in an instance must be freed when the instance containing those actions sets is destroyed.
11.3.1. Input Actions & Output Actions
Input actions are used to read sensors like buttons or joysticks while output actions are used for triggering haptics or motion platforms. The type of action created by xrCreateAction depends on the value of the XrActionType argument.
A given action can either be used for either input or output, but not both.
Input actions are queried using one of the xrGetActionState*
function
calls, while output actions are set using the haptics calls.
If either call is used with an action of the wrong type
XR_ERROR_ACTION_TYPE_MISMATCH
must be returned.
11.4. Suggested Bindings
Applications usually need to provide default bindings for their actions to
runtimes so that input data can be mapped appropriately to the application’s
actions.
Applications can do this by calling
xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings for each
interaction profile that the
applications has default bindings for.
If bindings are provided for an appropriate interaction profile, the runtime
may select one and input will begin to flow.
Interaction profile selection changes must only happen when
xrSyncActions is called.
Applications can call xrGetCurrentInteractionProfile during on a
running session to learn what the active interaction profile are for a top
level user path.
If this value ever changes, the runtime must send an
XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_INTERACTION_PROFILE_CHANGED
event to the
application to indicate that the value should be queried again.
The bindings suggested by this system are only a hint to the runtime. Some runtimes may choose to use a different device binding depending on user preference, accessibility settings, or for any other reason. If the runtime is using the values provided by suggested bindings, it must make a best effort to convert the input value to the created action and apply certain rules to that use so that suggested bindings function in the same way across runtimes. If an input value cannot be converted to the type of the action, the value must be ignored and not contribute to the state of the action.
For actions created with XR_ACTION_TYPE_BOOLEAN_INPUT
when the runtime
is obeying suggested bindings: Boolean input sources must be bound directly
to the action.
If the path is to a scalar value, a threshold must be applied to the value
and values over that threshold will be XR_TRUE
.
The runtime should use hysteresis when applying this threshold.
The threshold and hysteresis range may vary from device to device or
component to component and are left as an implementation detail.
If the path refers to the parent of input values instead of to an input
value itself, the runtime must use …/example/path/click instead
of …/example/path if it is available.
If a parent path does not have a …/click subpath, the runtime
must use …/value and apply the same thresholding that would be
applied to any scalar input.
In any other situation the runtime may provide an alternate binding for the
action or it will be unbound.
For actions created with XR_ACTION_TYPE_FLOAT_INPUT
when the runtime
is obeying suggested bindings: If the input value specified by the path is
scalar, the input value must be bound directly to the float.
If the path refers to the parent of input values instead of to an input
value itself, the runtime must use …/example/path/value instead
of …/example/path as the source of the value.
If a parent path does not have a …/value subpath, the runtime
must use …/click.
If the input value is boolean, the runtime must supply 0.0 or 1.0 as a
conversion of the boolean value.
In any other situation, the runtime may provide an alternate binding for
the action or it will be unbound.
For actions created with XR_ACTION_TYPE_VECTOR2F_INPUT
when the
runtime is obeying suggested bindings: The suggested binding path must
refer to the parent of input values instead of to the input values
themselves, and that parent path must contain subpaths …/x and
…/y.
…/x and …/y must be bound to 'x' and 'y' of the
vector, respectively.
In any other situation, the runtime may provide an alternate binding for
the action or it will be unbound.
For actions created with XR_ACTION_TYPE_POSE_INPUT
when the runtime is
obeying suggested bindings: Pose input sources must be bound directly to
the action.
If the path refers to the parent of input values instead of to an input
value itself, the runtime must use …/example/path/pose instead
of …/example/path if it is available.
In any other situation the runtime may provide an alternate binding for the
action or it will be unbound.
The XrEventDataInteractionProfileChanged structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrEventDataInteractionProfileChanged {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSession session;
} XrEventDataInteractionProfileChanged;
The XrEventDataInteractionProfileChanged event is sent to the application to notify it that the active input form factor for one or more top level user paths has changed. This event must only be sent for interaction profiles that the application indicated its support for via xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings. This event must only be sent for running sessions.
The application can call xrGetCurrentInteractionProfile if it wants to change its own behavior based on the active hardware.
The xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings(
XrInstance instance,
const XrInteractionProfileSuggestedBinding* suggestedBindings);
xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings sets an interaction profile for which the application can provide default bindings. The application can call xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings once per interaction profile that it supports.
The application can provide any number of bindings for each action.
If the application successfully calls xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings more than once for an interaction profile, the runtime must discard the previous suggested bindings and replace them with the new suggested bindings for that profile.
If the interaction profile path does not follow the structure defined in
Interaction Profiles or suggested
bindings contain paths that do not follow the format defined in
Device input subpaths, the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_PATH_UNSUPPORTED
.
If the interaction profile or input source for any of the suggested bindings
does not exist in the allowlist defined in
Interaction Profile Paths, the
runtime must return XR_ERROR_PATH_UNSUPPORTED
.
A runtime must accept every valid binding in the allowlist though it is
free to ignore any of them.
If the action set for any action referenced in the suggestedBindings
parameter has been included in a call to xrAttachSessionActionSets,
the implementation must return XR_ERROR_ACTIONSETS_ALREADY_ATTACHED
.
The XrInteractionProfileSuggestedBinding structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrInteractionProfileSuggestedBinding {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrPath interactionProfile;
uint32_t countSuggestedBindings;
const XrActionSuggestedBinding* suggestedBindings;
} XrInteractionProfileSuggestedBinding;
The XrActionSuggestedBinding structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionSuggestedBinding {
XrAction action;
XrPath binding;
} XrActionSuggestedBinding;
The xrAttachSessionActionSets function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrAttachSessionActionSets(
XrSession session,
const XrSessionActionSetsAttachInfo* attachInfo);
xrAttachSessionActionSets attaches the XrActionSet handles in
XrSessionActionSetsAttachInfo::actionSets
to the session
.
Action sets must be attached in order to be synchronized with
xrSyncActions.
When an action set is attached to a session, that action set becomes immutable. See xrCreateAction and xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings for details.
After action sets are attached to a session, if any unattached actions are
passed to functions for the same session, then for those functions the
runtime must return XR_ERROR_ACTIONSET_NOT_ATTACHED
.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_ACTIONSETS_ALREADY_ATTACHED
if
xrAttachSessionActionSets is called more than once for a given
session
.
The XrSessionActionSetsAttachInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrSessionActionSetsAttachInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
uint32_t countActionSets;
const XrActionSet* actionSets;
} XrSessionActionSetsAttachInfo;
The xrGetCurrentInteractionProfile function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetCurrentInteractionProfile(
XrSession session,
XrPath topLevelUserPath,
XrInteractionProfileState* interactionProfile);
xrGetCurrentInteractionProfile asks the runtime for the active interaction profiles for a top level user path.
The runtime must return only interaction profiles for which the application has provided bindings with xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings or XR_NULL_PATH. The runtime may return interaction profiles that do not represent physically present hardware, for example if the runtime is using a known interaction profile to bind to hardware that the application is not aware of. The runtime may return the last-known interaction profile in the event that no controllers are active.
If xrAttachSessionActionSets has not yet been called for the
session
, the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_ACTIONSET_NOT_ATTACHED
.
If topLevelUserPath
is not one of the device input subpaths described
in section /user paths, the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_PATH_UNSUPPORTED
.
The XrInteractionProfileState structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrInteractionProfileState {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrPath interactionProfile;
} XrInteractionProfileState;
The runtime must only include interaction profiles that the application has provided bindings for via xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings or XR_NULL_PATH. If the runtime is rebinding an interaction profile provided by the application to a device that the application did not provide bindings for, it must return the interaction profile path that it is emulating. If the runtime is unable to provide input because it cannot emulate any of the application-provided interaction profiles, it must return XR_NULL_PATH.
11.5. Reading Input Action State
The current state of an input action can be obtained by calling the
xrGetActionState*
function call that matches the XrActionType
provided when the action was created.
If a mismatched call is used to retrieve the state
XR_ERROR_ACTION_TYPE_MISMATCH
must be returned.
xrGetActionState*
calls for an action in an action set never bound to
the session with xrAttachSessionActionSets must return
XR_ERROR_ACTIONSET_NOT_ATTACHED
.
The result of calls to xrGetActionState*
for an XrAction and
subaction path must not change between calls to xrSyncActions.
When the combination of the parent XrActionSet and subaction path for
an action is passed to xrSyncActions, the runtime must update the
results from xrGetActionState*
after this call with any changes to the
state of the underlying hardware.
When the parent action set and subaction path for an action is removed from
or added to the list of active action sets passed to xrSyncActions,
the runtime must update isActive
to reflect the new active state
after this call.
In all cases the runtime must not change the results of
xrGetActionState*
calls between calls to xrSyncActions.
When xrGetActionState*
or haptic output functions are called while the
session is not focused, the runtime must set the
isActive
value to XR_FALSE
and suppress all haptic output.
Furthermore, the runtime should stop all in-progress haptic events when a
session loses focus.
When retrieving action state, lastChangeTime
must be set to the
runtime’s best estimate of when the physical state of the part of the device
bound to that action last changed.
The currentState
value is computed based on the current sync,
combining the underlying input sources bound to the provided
subactionPaths
within this action.
The changedSinceLastSync
value must be XR_TRUE
if the computed
currentState
value differs from the currentState
value that
would have been computed as of the previous sync for the same
subactionPaths
.
If there is no previous sync, or the action was not active for the previous
sync, the changedSinceLastSync
value must be set to XR_FALSE
.
The isActive
value must be XR_TRUE
whenever an action is bound
and a source is providing state data for the current sync.
If the action is unbound or no source is present, the isActive
value
must be XR_FALSE
.
For any action which is inactive, the runtime must return zero (or
XR_FALSE
) for state, XR_FALSE
for changedSinceLastSync
,
and 0
for lastChangeTime
.
11.5.1. Resolving a single action bound to multiple inputs or outputs
It is often the case that a single action will be bound to multiple physical inputs simultaneously. In these circumstances, the runtime must resolve the ambiguity in that multiple binding as follows:
The current state value is selected based on the type of the action:
-
Boolean actions - The current state must be the result of a boolean
OR
of all bound inputs -
Float actions - The current state must be the state of the input with the largest absolute value
-
Vector2 actions - The current state must be the state of the input with the longest length
-
Pose actions - The current state must be the state of a single pose source. The source of the pose must only be changed during a call to xrSyncAction. The runtime should only change the source in response to user actions, such as picking up a new controller, or external events, such as a controller running out of battery.
-
Haptic actions - The runtime must send output events to all bound haptic devices
11.5.2. Structs to describe action and subaction paths
The XrActionStateGetInfo structure is used to provide action and
subaction paths when calling xrGetActionState*
function.
It is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionStateGetInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrAction action;
XrPath subactionPath;
} XrActionStateGetInfo;
See XrActionCreateInfo for a description of subaction paths, and the restrictions on their use.
The XrHapticActionInfo structure is used to provide action and
subaction paths when calling xr*HapticFeedback
function.
It is defined as:
typedef struct XrHapticActionInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrAction action;
XrPath subactionPath;
} XrHapticActionInfo;
See XrActionCreateInfo for a description of subaction paths, and the restrictions on their use.
11.5.3. Boolean Actions
xrGetActionStateBoolean retrieves the current state of a boolean action. It is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetActionStateBoolean(
XrSession session,
const XrActionStateGetInfo* getInfo,
XrActionStateBoolean* state);
The XrActionStateBoolean structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionStateBoolean {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrBool32 currentState;
XrBool32 changedSinceLastSync;
XrTime lastChangeTime;
XrBool32 isActive;
} XrActionStateBoolean;
When multiple input sources are bound to this action, the currentState
follows the previously defined rule to resolve
ambiguity.
11.5.4. Scalar and Vector Actions
xrGetActionStateFloat retrieves the current state of a floating-point action. It is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetActionStateFloat(
XrSession session,
const XrActionStateGetInfo* getInfo,
XrActionStateFloat* state);
The XrActionStateFloat structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionStateFloat {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
float currentState;
XrBool32 changedSinceLastSync;
XrTime lastChangeTime;
XrBool32 isActive;
} XrActionStateFloat;
When multiple input sources are bound to this action, the currentState
follows the previously defined rule to resolve
ambiguity.
xrGetActionStateVector2f retrieves the current state of a two-dimensional vector action. It is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetActionStateVector2f(
XrSession session,
const XrActionStateGetInfo* getInfo,
XrActionStateVector2f* state);
The XrActionStateVector2f structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionStateVector2f {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrVector2f currentState;
XrBool32 changedSinceLastSync;
XrTime lastChangeTime;
XrBool32 isActive;
} XrActionStateVector2f;
When multiple input sources are bound to this action, the currentState
follows the previously defined rule to resolve
ambiguity.
11.5.5. Pose Actions
The xrGetActionStatePose function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetActionStatePose(
XrSession session,
const XrActionStateGetInfo* getInfo,
XrActionStatePose* state);
xrGetActionStatePose returns information about the binding and active state for the specified action. To determine the pose of this action at a historical or predicted time, the application can create an action space using xrCreateActionSpace. Then, after each sync, the application can locate the pose of this action space within a base space using xrLocateSpace.
The XrActionStatePose structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionStatePose {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrBool32 isActive;
} XrActionStatePose;
A pose action must not be bound to multiple input sources, according to the previously defined rule.
11.6. Output Actions and Haptics
Haptic feedback is sent to a device using the xrApplyHapticFeedback
function.
The hapticEvent
points to a supported event structure.
All event structures have in common that the first element is an
XrHapticBaseHeader which can be used to determine the type of the
haptic event.
Haptic feedback may be immediately halted for a haptic action using the xrStopHapticFeedback function.
Output action requests activate immediately and must not wait for the next call to xrSyncActions.
If a haptic event is sent to an action before a previous haptic event completes, the latest event will take precedence and the runtime must cancel all preceding incomplete haptic events on that action.
Output action requests must be discarded and have no effect on hardware if the application’s session is not focused.
Output action requests for an action in an action set never attached to the
session with xrAttachSessionActionSets must return
XR_ERROR_ACTIONSET_NOT_ATTACHED
.
The only haptics type supported by unextended OpenXR is XrHapticVibration.
The xrApplyHapticFeedback function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrApplyHapticFeedback(
XrSession session,
const XrHapticActionInfo* hapticActionInfo,
const XrHapticBaseHeader* hapticFeedback);
Triggers a haptic event through the specified action of type
XR_ACTION_TYPE_VIBRATION_OUTPUT
.
The runtime should deliver this request to the appropriate device, but
exactly which device, if any, this event is sent to is up to the runtime to
decide.
If an appropriate device is unavailable the runtime may ignore this request
for haptic feedback.
If session
is not focused, the runtime must return
XR_SESSION_NOT_FOCUSED
, and not trigger a haptic event.
If another haptic event from this session is currently happening on the device bound to this action, the runtime must interrupt that other event and replace it with the new one.
The XrHapticBaseHeader structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrHapticBaseHeader {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
} XrHapticBaseHeader;
The XrHapticVibration structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
typedef struct XrHapticVibration {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrDuration duration;
float frequency;
float amplitude;
} XrHapticVibration;
The XrHapticVibration is used in calls to xrApplyHapticFeedback
that trigger vibration
output actions.
The duration
, and frequency
parameters may be clamped to
implementation-dependent ranges.
XR_MIN_HAPTIC_DURATION is used to indicate to the runtime that a short haptic pulse of the minimal supported duration for the haptic device.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_MIN_HAPTIC_DURATION -1
XR_FREQUENCY_UNSPECIFIED is used to indicate that the application wants the runtime to decide what the optimal frequency is for the haptic pulse.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_FREQUENCY_UNSPECIFIED 0
The xrStopHapticFeedback function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrStopHapticFeedback(
XrSession session,
const XrHapticActionInfo* hapticActionInfo);
If a haptic event from this XrAction is in progress, when this function is called the runtime must stop that event.
If session
is not focused, the runtime must return
XR_SESSION_NOT_FOCUSED
.
11.7. Input Action State Synchronization
The xrSyncActions function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrSyncActions(
XrSession session,
const XrActionsSyncInfo* syncInfo);
xrSyncActions updates the current state of input actions.
Repeated input action state queries between subsequent synchronization calls
must return the same values.
The XrActionSet structures referenced in the
XrActionsSyncInfo::activeActionSets
must have been previously
attached to the session via xrAttachSessionActionSets.
If any action sets not attached to this session are passed to
xrSyncActions it must return XR_ERROR_ACTIONSET_NOT_ATTACHED
.
Subsets of the bound action sets can be synchronized in order to control
which actions are seen as active.
If session
is not focused, the runtime must return
XR_SESSION_NOT_FOCUSED
, and all action states in the session must be
inactive.
The XrActionsSyncInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActionsSyncInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
uint32_t countActiveActionSets;
const XrActiveActionSet* activeActionSets;
} XrActionsSyncInfo;
The XrActiveActionSet structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrActiveActionSet {
XrActionSet actionSet;
XrPath subactionPath;
} XrActiveActionSet;
This structure defines a single active action set and subaction path combination. Applications can provide a list of these structures to the xrSyncActions function.
11.8. Bound Sources
An application can use the xrEnumerateBoundSourcesForAction and
xrGetInputSourceLocalizedName calls to prompt the user which physical
inputs to use in order to perform an action.
The bound sources
are XrPath
semantic paths representing the
physical controls that an action is bound to.
An action may be bound to multiple sources at one time, for example an
action named hold
could be bound to both the X and A buttons.
Once the bound sources for an action are obtained, the application can gather additional information about it. xrGetInputSourceLocalizedName returns a localized human-readable string describing the bound physical control, e.g. 'A Button'.
The xrEnumerateBoundSourcesForAction function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrEnumerateBoundSourcesForAction(
XrSession session,
const XrBoundSourcesForActionEnumerateInfo* enumerateInfo,
uint32_t sourceCapacityInput,
uint32_t* sourceCountOutput,
XrPath* sources);
If an action is unbound, xrEnumerateBoundSourcesForAction must assign
0
to the value pointed-to by sourceCountOutput
and not modify the
array.
xrEnumerateBoundSourcesForAction must return
XR_ERROR_ACTIONSET_NOT_ATTACHED
if passed an action in an action set
never attached to the session with xrAttachSessionActionSets.
As bindings for actions do not change between calls to xrSyncActions,
xrEnumerateBoundSourcesForAction must enumerate the same set of bound
sources, or absence of bound sources, for a given query (defined by the
enumerateInfo
parameter) between any two calls to xrSyncActions.
Note
The |
The XrBoundSourcesForActionEnumerateInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrBoundSourcesForActionEnumerateInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrAction action;
} XrBoundSourcesForActionEnumerateInfo;
The xrGetInputSourceLocalizedName function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
XrResult xrGetInputSourceLocalizedName(
XrSession session,
const XrInputSourceLocalizedNameGetInfo* getInfo,
uint32_t bufferCapacityInput,
uint32_t* bufferCountOutput,
char* buffer);
xrGetInputSourceLocalizedName returns a string for the bound source in the current system locale.
If xrAttachSessionActionSets has not yet been called for the session,
the runtime must return XR_ERROR_ACTIONSET_NOT_ATTACHED
.
The XrInputSourceLocalizedNameGetInfo structure is defined as:
typedef struct XrInputSourceLocalizedNameGetInfo {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrPath sourcePath;
XrInputSourceLocalizedNameFlags whichComponents;
} XrInputSourceLocalizedNameGetInfo;
The result of passing an XrPath
sourcePath
not retrieved
from xrEnumerateBoundSourcesForAction is not specified.
The XrInputSourceLocalizedNameGetInfo::whichComponents
parameter
is of the following type, and contains a bitwise-OR of one or more of the
bits defined in XrInputSourceLocalizedNameFlagBits.
typedef XrFlags64 XrInputSourceLocalizedNameFlags;
// Flag bits for XrInputSourceLocalizedNameFlags
static const XrInputSourceLocalizedNameFlags XR_INPUT_SOURCE_LOCALIZED_NAME_USER_PATH_BIT = 0x00000001;
static const XrInputSourceLocalizedNameFlags XR_INPUT_SOURCE_LOCALIZED_NAME_INTERACTION_PROFILE_BIT = 0x00000002;
static const XrInputSourceLocalizedNameFlags XR_INPUT_SOURCE_LOCALIZED_NAME_COMPONENT_BIT = 0x00000004;
The flag bits have the following meanings:
12. List of Extensions
12.1. XR_KHR_android_create_instance
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_android_create_instance
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
9
- Revision
-
3
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-07-17
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Robert Menzel, NVIDIA
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm
Krzysztof Kosiński, Google
Overview
When the application creates an XrInstance object on Android systems, additional information from the application has to be provided to the XR runtime.
The Android XR runtime must return error XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
if the additional information is not provided by the application or if the
additional parameters are invalid.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_INSTANCE_CREATE_INFO_ANDROID_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The XrInstanceCreateInfoAndroidKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_android_create_instance
typedef struct XrInstanceCreateInfoAndroidKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
void* applicationVM;
void* applicationActivity;
} XrInstanceCreateInfoAndroidKHR;
XrInstanceCreateInfoAndroidKHR contains additional Android specific
information needed when calling xrCreateInstance.
The applicationVM
field should be populated with the JavaVM
structure received by the JNI_OnLoad
function, while the
applicationActivity
field will typically contain a reference to a Java
activity object received through an application-specific native method.
The XrInstanceCreateInfoAndroidKHR structure must be provided in the
next
chain of the XrInstanceCreateInfo structure when calling
xrCreateInstance.
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2017-05-26 (Robert Menzel)
-
Initial draft
-
-
Revision 2, 2019-01-24 (Martin Renschler)
-
Added error code, reformatted
-
-
Revision 3, 2019-07-17 (Krzysztof Kosiński)
-
Non-substantive clarifications.
-
12.2. XR_KHR_android_surface_swapchain
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_android_surface_swapchain
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
5
- Revision
-
4
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-05-30
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Krzysztof Kosiński, Google
Johannes van Waveren, Oculus
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm
Overview
A common activity in XR is to view an image stream.
Image streams are often the result of camera previews or decoded video
streams.
On Android, the basic primitive representing the producer end of an image
queue is the class android.view.Surface
.
This extension provides a special swapchain that uses an
android.view.Surface
as its producer end.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
New Enums
New Structures
New Functions
To create an XrSwapchain object and an Android Surface object call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_android_surface_swapchain
XrResult xrCreateSwapchainAndroidSurfaceKHR(
XrSession session,
const XrSwapchainCreateInfo* info,
XrSwapchain* swapchain,
jobject* surface);
xrCreateSwapchainAndroidSurfaceKHR creates an XrSwapchain object
returned in swapchain
and an Android Surface jobject
returned in
surface
.
The jobject
must be valid to be passed back to Java code using JNI and
must be valid to be used with ordinary Android APIs for submitting images
to Surfaces.
The returned XrSwapchain must be valid to be referenced in
XrSwapchainSubImage structures to show content on the screen.
The width and height passed in XrSwapchainCreateInfo may not be
persistent throughout the life cycle of the created swapchain, since on
Android, the size of the images is controlled by the producer and possibly
changes at any time.
The only function that is allowed to be called on the XrSwapchain returned from this function is xrDestroySwapchain. For example, calling any of the functions xrEnumerateSwapchainImages, xrAcquireSwapchainImage, xrWaitSwapchainImage or xrReleaseSwapchainImage is invalid.
When the application receives the XrEventDataSessionStateChanged event
with the XR_SESSION_STATE_STOPPING
state, it must ensure that no
threads are writing to any of the Android surfaces created with this
extension before calling xrEndSession.
The effect of writing frames to the Surface when the session is in states
other than XR_SESSION_STATE_VISIBLE
or XR_SESSION_STATE_FOCUSED
is undefined.
xrCreateSwapchainAndroidSurfaceKHR must return the same set of error
codes as xrCreateSwapchain under the same circumstances, plus
XR_ERROR_FUNCTION_UNSUPPORTED
in case the function is not supported.
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2017-01-17 (Johannes van Waveren)
-
Initial draft
-
-
Revision 2, 2017-10-30 (Kaye Mason)
-
Changed images to swapchains, used snippet includes. Added issue for Surfaces.
-
-
Revision 3, 2018-05-16 (Krzysztof Kosiński)
-
Refactored to use Surface instead of SurfaceTexture.
-
-
Revision 4, 2019-01-24 (Martin Renschler)
-
Refined the specification of the extension
-
12.3. XR_KHR_android_thread_settings
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_android_thread_settings
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
4
- Revision
-
6
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2023-12-04
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Cass Everitt, Oculus
Johannes van Waveren, Oculus
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm
Krzysztof Kosiński, Google
Xiang Wei, Meta
Overview
For XR to be comfortable, it is important for applications to deliver frames quickly and consistently. In order to make sure the important application threads get their full share of time, these threads must be identified to the system, which will adjust their scheduling priority accordingly.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrResult enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_ERROR_ANDROID_THREAD_SETTINGS_ID_INVALID_KHR
-
XR_ERROR_ANDROID_THREAD_SETTINGS_FAILURE_KHR
New Enums
The possible thread types are specified by the XrAndroidThreadTypeKHR enumeration:
// Provided by XR_KHR_android_thread_settings
typedef enum XrAndroidThreadTypeKHR {
XR_ANDROID_THREAD_TYPE_APPLICATION_MAIN_KHR = 1,
XR_ANDROID_THREAD_TYPE_APPLICATION_WORKER_KHR = 2,
XR_ANDROID_THREAD_TYPE_RENDERER_MAIN_KHR = 3,
XR_ANDROID_THREAD_TYPE_RENDERER_WORKER_KHR = 4,
XR_ANDROID_THREAD_TYPE_MAX_ENUM_KHR = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrAndroidThreadTypeKHR;
New Structures
New Functions
To declare a thread to be of a certain XrAndroidThreadTypeKHR type call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_android_thread_settings
XrResult xrSetAndroidApplicationThreadKHR(
XrSession session,
XrAndroidThreadTypeKHR threadType,
uint32_t threadId);
xrSetAndroidApplicationThreadKHR allows to declare an XR-critical thread and to classify it.
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2017-01-17 (Johannes van Waveren)
-
Initial draft.
-
-
Revision 2, 2017-10-31 (Armelle Laine)
-
Move the performance settings to EXT extension.
-
-
Revision 3, 2018-12-20 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Revised the error code naming to use KHR and renamed xrSetApplicationThreadKHR → xrSetAndroidApplicationThreadKHR.
-
-
Revision 4, 2019-01-24 (Martin Renschler)
-
Added enum specification, reformatting
-
-
Revision 5, 2019-07-17 (Krzysztof Kosiński)
-
Clarify the type of thread identifier used by the extension.
-
-
Revision 6, 2023-12-04 (Xiang Wei)
-
Revise/fix the hints of enum specification
-
12.4. XR_KHR_binding_modification
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_binding_modification
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
121
- Revision
-
1
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2020-07-29
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Joe Ludwig, Valve
- Contacts
-
Joe Ludwig, Valve
Overview
This extension adds an optional structure that can be included on the
XrInteractionProfileSuggestedBinding::next
chain passed to
xrSuggestInteractionProfileBindings to specify additional information
to modify default binding behavior.
This extension does not define any actual modification structs, but includes the list of modifications and the XrBindingModificationBaseHeaderKHR structure to allow other extensions to provide specific modifications.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_BINDING_MODIFICATIONS_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The XrBindingModificationsKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_binding_modification
typedef struct XrBindingModificationsKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
uint32_t bindingModificationCount;
const XrBindingModificationBaseHeaderKHR* const* bindingModifications;
} XrBindingModificationsKHR;
The XrBindingModificationBaseHeaderKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_binding_modification
typedef struct XrBindingModificationBaseHeaderKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
} XrBindingModificationBaseHeaderKHR;
The XrBindingModificationBaseHeaderKHR is a base structure is
overridden by XrBindingModification*
child structures.
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2020-08-06 (Joe Ludwig)
-
Initial draft.
-
12.5. XR_KHR_composition_layer_color_scale_bias
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_composition_layer_color_scale_bias
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
35
- Revision
-
5
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-01-28
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Cass Everitt, Oculus
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm
Overview
Color scale and bias are applied to a layer color during composition, after its conversion to premultiplied alpha representation.
If specified, colorScale
and colorBias
must be used to alter
the LayerColor as follows:
-
colorScale = max( vec4( 0, 0, 0, 0 ), colorScale )
-
LayerColor.RGB = LayerColor.A > 0 ? LayerColor.RGB / LayerColor.A : vec3( 0, 0, 0 )
-
LayerColor = LayerColor * colorScale + colorBias
-
LayerColor.RGB *= LayerColor.A
This extension specifies the XrCompositionLayerColorScaleBiasKHR
structure, which, if present in the
XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader::next
chain, must be applied to
the composition layer.
This extension does not define a new composition layer type, but rather it defines a transform that may be applied to the color derived from existing composition layer types.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_COLOR_SCALE_BIAS_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The XrCompositionLayerColorScaleBiasKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_color_scale_bias
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerColorScaleBiasKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrColor4f colorScale;
XrColor4f colorBias;
} XrCompositionLayerColorScaleBiasKHR;
XrCompositionLayerColorScaleBiasKHR contains the information needed to scale and bias the color of layer textures.
The XrCompositionLayerColorScaleBiasKHR structure can be applied by
applications to composition layers by adding an instance of the struct to
the XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader::next
list.
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2017-09-13 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Initial implementation.
-
-
Revision 2, 2019-01-24 (Martin Renschler)
-
Formatting, spec language changes
-
-
Revision 3, 2019-01-28 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Revised math to remove premultiplied alpha before applying color scale and offset, then restoring.
-
-
Revision 4, 2019-07-17 (Cass Everitt)
-
Non-substantive updates to the spec language and equations.
-
-
Revision 5, 2020-05-20 (Cass Everitt)
-
Changed extension name, simplified language.
-
12.6. XR_KHR_composition_layer_cube
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_composition_layer_cube
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
7
- Revision
-
8
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-01-24
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Johannes van Waveren, Oculus
Cass Everitt, Oculus
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Gloria Kennickell, Oculus
Sam Martin, ARM
Kaye Mason, Google, Inc.
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm - Contacts
-
Cass Everitt, Oculus
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Overview
This extension adds an additional layer type that enables direct sampling from cubemaps.
The cube layer is the natural layer type for hardware accelerated environment maps. Without updating the image source, the user can look all around, and the compositor can display what they are looking at without intervention from the application.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_CUBE_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The XrCompositionLayerCubeKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_cube
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerCubeKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrCompositionLayerFlags layerFlags;
XrSpace space;
XrEyeVisibility eyeVisibility;
XrSwapchain swapchain;
uint32_t imageArrayIndex;
XrQuaternionf orientation;
} XrCompositionLayerCubeKHR;
XrCompositionLayerCubeKHR contains the information needed to render a cube map when calling xrEndFrame. XrCompositionLayerCubeKHR is an alias type for the base struct XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader used in XrFrameEndInfo.
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 0, 2017-02-01 (Johannes van Waveren)
-
Initial draft.
-
-
Revision 1, 2017-05-19 (Sam Martin)
-
Initial draft, moving the 3 layer types to an extension.
-
-
Revision 2, 2017-08-30 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Updated the specification.
-
-
Revision 3, 2017-10-12 (Cass Everitt)
-
Updated to reflect per-eye structs and the change to swapchains
-
-
Revision 4, 2017-10-18 (Kaye Mason)
-
Update to flatten structs to remove per-eye arrays.
-
-
Revision 5, 2017-12-05 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Updated to break out the cylinder and equirect features into separate extensions.
-
-
Revision 6, 2017-12-07 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Updated to use transform components instead of transform matrices.
-
-
Revision 7, 2017-12-07 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Updated to convert XrPosef to XrQuaternionf (there’s no position component).
-
-
Revision 8, 2019-01-24 (Martin Renschler)
-
Updated struct to use XrSwapchainSubImage, reformat and spec language changes, eye parameter description update
-
12.7. XR_KHR_composition_layer_cylinder
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_composition_layer_cylinder
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
18
- Revision
-
4
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-01-24
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
James Hughes, Oculus
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm - Contacts
-
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Cass Everitt, Oculus
Overview
This extension adds an additional layer type where the XR runtime must map a texture stemming from a swapchain onto the inside of a cylinder section. It can be imagined much the same way a curved television display looks to a viewer. This is not a projection type of layer but rather an object-in-world type of layer, similar to XrCompositionLayerQuad. Only the interior of the cylinder surface must be visible; the exterior of the cylinder is not visible and must not be drawn by the runtime.
The cylinder characteristics are specified by the following parameters:
XrPosef pose;
float radius;
float centralAngle;
float aspectRatio;
These can be understood via the following diagram, which is a top-down view of a horizontally oriented cylinder. The aspect ratio drives how tall the cylinder will appear based on the other parameters. Typically the aspectRatio would be set to be the aspect ratio of the texture being used, so that it looks the same within the cylinder as it does in 2D.
-
r — Radius
-
a — Central angle in (0, 2π)
-
p — Origin of pose transform
-
U/V — UV coordinates
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_CYLINDER_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The XrCompositionLayerCylinderKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_cylinder
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerCylinderKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrCompositionLayerFlags layerFlags;
XrSpace space;
XrEyeVisibility eyeVisibility;
XrSwapchainSubImage subImage;
XrPosef pose;
float radius;
float centralAngle;
float aspectRatio;
} XrCompositionLayerCylinderKHR;
XrCompositionLayerCylinderKHR contains the information needed to render a texture onto a cylinder when calling xrEndFrame. XrCompositionLayerCylinderKHR is an alias type for the base struct XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader used in XrFrameEndInfo.
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2017-05-19 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Initial version. This was originally part of a single extension which supported multiple such extension layer types.
-
-
Revision 2, 2017-12-07 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Updated to use transform components instead of transform matrices.
-
-
Revision 3, 2018-03-05 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Added improved documentation and brought the documentation in line with the existing core spec.
-
-
Revision 4, 2019-01-24 (Martin Renschler)
-
Reformatted, spec language changes, eye parameter description update
-
12.8. XR_KHR_composition_layer_depth
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_composition_layer_depth
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
11
- Revision
-
6
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-01-24
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Bryce Hutchings, Microsoft
Andreas Loeve Selvik, Arm
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm
Overview
This extension defines an extra layer type which allows applications to submit depth images along with color images in projection layers, i.e. XrCompositionLayerProjection.
The XR runtime may use this information to perform more accurate reprojections taking depth into account. Use of this extension does not affect the order of layer composition as described in Compositing.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_DEPTH_INFO_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
When submitting depth images along with projection layers, add the
XrCompositionLayerDepthInfoKHR to the next
chain for all
XrCompositionLayerProjectionView structures in the given layer.
The XrCompositionLayerDepthInfoKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_depth
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerDepthInfoKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSwapchainSubImage subImage;
float minDepth;
float maxDepth;
float nearZ;
float farZ;
} XrCompositionLayerDepthInfoKHR;
Note
The window space depth values |
Note
A reversed mapping of depth, such that points closer to the view have a window space depth that is greater than points further away can be achieved by making nearZ > farZ. |
XrCompositionLayerDepthInfoKHR contains the information needed to
associate depth with the color information in a projection layer.
When submitting depth images along with projection layers, add the
XrCompositionLayerDepthInfoKHR to the next
chain for all
XrCompositionLayerProjectionView structures in the given layer.
The homogeneous transform from view space z to window space depth is given by the following matrix, where a = minDepth, b = maxDepth, n = nearZ, and f = farZ.
Homogeneous values are constructed from real values by appending a w component with value 1.0.
General homogeneous values are projected back to real space by dividing by the w component.
New Functions
Issues
-
Should the range of
minDepth
andmaxDepth
be constrained to [0,1]?RESOLVED: Yes.
There is no compelling mathematical reason for this constraint, however, it does not impose any hardship currently, and the constraint could be relaxed in a future version of the extension if needed.
-
Should we require
minDepth
be less thanmaxDepth
?RESOLVED: Yes.
There is no compelling mathematical reason for this constraint, however, it does not impose any hardship currently, and the constraint could be relaxed in a future version of the extension if needed. Reverse z mappings can be achieved by making
nearZ
>farZ
. -
Does this extension support view space depth images?
RESOLVED: No.
The formulation of the transform between view and window depths implies projected depth. A different extension would be needed to support a different interpretation of depth. -
Is there any constraint on the resolution of the depth subimage?
RESOLVED: No.
The resolution of the depth image need not match that of the corresponding color image.
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2017-08-18 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Initial proposal.
-
-
Revision 2, 2017-10-30 (Kaye Mason)
-
Migration from Images to Swapchains.
-
-
Revision 3, 2018-07-20 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Support for swapchain texture arrays
-
-
Revision 4, 2018-12-17 (Andreas Loeve Selvik)
-
depthImageRect in pixels instead of UVs
-
-
Revision 5, 2019-01-24 (Martin Renschler)
-
changed depthSwapchain/depthImageRect/depthImageArrayIndex
to XrSwapchainSubImage -
reformat and spec language changes
-
removed vendor specific terminology
-
-
Revision 6, 2022-02-16 (Cass Everitt)
-
Provide homogeneous transform as function of provided parameters
-
12.9. XR_KHR_composition_layer_equirect
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_composition_layer_equirect
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
19
- Revision
-
3
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-01-24
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Johannes van Waveren, Oculus
Cass Everitt, Oculus
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Gloria Kennickell, Oculus
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm - Contacts
-
Cass Everitt, Oculus
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Overview
This extension adds an additional layer type where the XR runtime must map an equirectangular coded image stemming from a swapchain onto the inside of a sphere.
The equirect layer type provides most of the same benefits as a cubemap, but from an equirect 2D image source. This image source is appealing mostly because equirect environment maps are very common, and the highest quality you can get from them is by sampling them directly in the compositor.
This is not a projection type of layer but rather an object-in-world type of layer, similar to XrCompositionLayerQuad. Only the interior of the sphere surface must be visible; the exterior of the sphere is not visible and must not be drawn by the runtime.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_EQUIRECT_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The XrCompositionLayerEquirectKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_equirect
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerEquirectKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrCompositionLayerFlags layerFlags;
XrSpace space;
XrEyeVisibility eyeVisibility;
XrSwapchainSubImage subImage;
XrPosef pose;
float radius;
XrVector2f scale;
XrVector2f bias;
} XrCompositionLayerEquirectKHR;
XrCompositionLayerEquirectKHR contains the information needed to render an equirectangular image onto a sphere when calling xrEndFrame. XrCompositionLayerEquirectKHR is an alias type for the base struct XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader used in XrFrameEndInfo.
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2017-05-19 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Initial version. This was originally part of a single extension which supported multiple such extension layer types.
-
-
Revision 2, 2017-12-07 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Updated to use transform components instead of transform matrices.
-
-
Revision 3, 2019-01-24 (Martin Renschler)
-
Reformatted, spec language changes, eye parameter description update
-
12.10. XR_KHR_composition_layer_equirect2
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_composition_layer_equirect2
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
92
- Revision
-
1
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-01-24
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Johannes van Waveren, Oculus
Cass Everitt, Oculus
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Gloria Kennickell, Oculus
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm - Contacts
-
Cass Everitt, Oculus
Overview
This extension adds an additional layer type where the XR runtime must map an equirectangular coded image stemming from a swapchain onto the inside of a sphere.
The equirect layer type provides most of the same benefits as a cubemap, but from an equirect 2D image source. This image source is appealing mostly because equirect environment maps are very common, and the highest quality you can get from them is by sampling them directly in the compositor.
This is not a projection type of layer but rather an object-in-world type of layer, similar to XrCompositionLayerQuad. Only the interior of the sphere surface must be visible; the exterior of the sphere is not visible and must not be drawn by the runtime.
This extension uses a different parameterization more in keeping with the formulation of KHR_composition_layer_cylinder but is functionally equivalent to KHR_composition_layer_equirect.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_EQUIRECT2_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The XrCompositionLayerEquirect2KHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_equirect2
typedef struct XrCompositionLayerEquirect2KHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrCompositionLayerFlags layerFlags;
XrSpace space;
XrEyeVisibility eyeVisibility;
XrSwapchainSubImage subImage;
XrPosef pose;
float radius;
float centralHorizontalAngle;
float upperVerticalAngle;
float lowerVerticalAngle;
} XrCompositionLayerEquirect2KHR;
XrCompositionLayerEquirect2KHR contains the information needed to render an equirectangular image onto a sphere when calling xrEndFrame. XrCompositionLayerEquirect2KHR is an alias type for the base struct XrCompositionLayerBaseHeader used in XrFrameEndInfo.
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2020-05-08 (Cass Everitt)
-
Initial version.
-
Kept contributors from the original equirect extension.
-
12.11. XR_KHR_convert_timespec_time
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_convert_timespec_time
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
37
- Revision
-
1
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-01-24
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Overview
This extension provides two functions for converting between timespec
monotonic time and XrTime
.
The xrConvertTimespecTimeToTimeKHR function converts from timespec
time to XrTime
, while the xrConvertTimeToTimespecTimeKHR
function converts XrTime
to timespec monotonic time.
The primary use case for this functionality is to be able to synchronize
events between the local system and the OpenXR system.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
New Enums
New Structures
New Functions
To convert from timespec monotonic time to XrTime
, call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_convert_timespec_time
XrResult xrConvertTimespecTimeToTimeKHR(
XrInstance instance,
const struct timespec* timespecTime,
XrTime* time);
The xrConvertTimespecTimeToTimeKHR function converts a time obtained
by the clock_gettime
function to the equivalent XrTime
.
If the output time
cannot represent the input timespecTime
, the
runtime must return XR_ERROR_TIME_INVALID
.
To convert from XrTime
to timespec monotonic time, call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_convert_timespec_time
XrResult xrConvertTimeToTimespecTimeKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrTime time,
struct timespec* timespecTime);
The xrConvertTimeToTimespecTimeKHR function converts an
XrTime
to time as if generated by clock_gettime
.
If the output timespecTime
cannot represent the input time
, the
runtime must return XR_ERROR_TIME_INVALID
.
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2019-01-24 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Initial draft
-
12.12. XR_KHR_D3D11_enable
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_D3D11_enable
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
28
- Revision
-
9
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2018-11-16
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Bryce Hutchings, Microsoft
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Mark Young, LunarG
Minmin Gong, Microsoft
Matthieu Bucchianeri, Microsoft
Overview
This extension enables the use of the D3D11 graphics API in an OpenXR runtime. Without this extension, the OpenXR runtime may not be able to use any D3D11 swapchain images.
This extension provides the mechanisms necessary for an application to generate a valid XrGraphicsBindingD3D11KHR structure in order to create a D3D11-based XrSession. Note that during this process the application is responsible for creating all the required D3D11 objects, including a graphics device to be used for rendering.
This extension also provides mechanisms for the application to interact with images acquired by calling xrEnumerateSwapchainImages.
In order to expose the structures, types, and functions of this extension,
you must define XR_USE_GRAPHICS_API_D3D11 before including the OpenXR
platform header openxr_platform.h
, in all portions of your library or
application that include it.
Swapchain Flag Bits
All XrSwapchainUsageFlags values passed in a session created using XrGraphicsBindingD3D11KHR must be interpreted as follows by the runtime, so that the returned swapchain images used by the application may be used as if they were created with the corresponding D3D11_BIND_FLAG flags. The runtime may set additional bind flags but must not restrict usage.
XrSwapchainUsageFlagBits | Corresponding D3D11 bind flag bits |
---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ignored |
|
ignored |
|
|
|
ignored |
|
ignored |
All D3D11 swapchain textures are created with D3D11_USAGE_DEFAULT usage.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_D3D11_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_D3D11_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_D3D11_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The following structures are provided to supply supporting runtimes the necessary information required to work with the D3D11 API executing on certain operating systems.
The XrGraphicsBindingD3D11KHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D11_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsBindingD3D11KHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
ID3D11Device* device;
} XrGraphicsBindingD3D11KHR;
When creating a D3D11-backed XrSession, the application will provide a
pointer to an XrGraphicsBindingD3D11KHR in the
XrSessionCreateInfo::next
field of structure passed to
xrCreateSession.
The D3D11 device specified in XrGraphicsBindingD3D11KHR::device
must be created in accordance with the requirements retrieved through
xrGetD3D11GraphicsRequirementsKHR, otherwise xrCreateSession
must return XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_DEVICE_INVALID
.
The XrSwapchainImageD3D11KHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D11_enable
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageD3D11KHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
ID3D11Texture2D* texture;
} XrSwapchainImageD3D11KHR;
If a given session was created with XrGraphicsBindingD3D11KHR, the following conditions must apply.
-
Calls to xrEnumerateSwapchainImages on an XrSwapchain in that session must return an array of XrSwapchainImageD3D11KHR structures.
-
Whenever an OpenXR function accepts an XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader pointer as a parameter in that session, the runtime must also accept a pointer to an XrSwapchainImageD3D11KHR.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the top-left corner of the swapchain image as the coordinate origin unless specified otherwise by extension functionality.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the swapchain images in a clip space of positive Y pointing up, near Z plane at 0, and far Z plane at 1.
The XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D11KHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D11_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D11KHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
LUID adapterLuid;
D3D_FEATURE_LEVEL minFeatureLevel;
} XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D11KHR;
XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D11KHR is populated by xrGetD3D11GraphicsRequirementsKHR.
New Functions
Some computer systems may have multiple graphics devices, each of which may have independent external display outputs. XR systems that connect to such graphics devices are typically connected to a single device. Applications need to know what graphics device the XR system is connected to so that they can use that graphics device to generate XR images.
To retrieve the D3D11 feature level and graphics device for an instance and system, call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D11_enable
XrResult xrGetD3D11GraphicsRequirementsKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D11KHR* graphicsRequirements);
The xrGetD3D11GraphicsRequirementsKHR function identifies to the
application what graphics device (Windows LUID) needs to be used and the
minimum feature level to use.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
(XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
may be returned due to legacy behavior)
on calls to xrCreateSession if xrGetD3D11GraphicsRequirementsKHR
has not been called for the same instance
and systemId
.
The LUID and feature level that xrGetD3D11GraphicsRequirementsKHR
returns must be used to create the ID3D11Device
that the application
passes to xrCreateSession in the XrGraphicsBindingD3D11KHR.
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2018-05-07 (Mark Young)
-
Initial draft
-
-
Revision 2, 2018-06-21 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Split
XR_KHR_D3D_enable
intoXR_KHR_D3D11_enable
-
Rename and expand
xrGetD3DGraphicsDeviceKHR
functionality toxrGetD3D11GraphicsRequirementsKHR
-
-
Revision 3, 2018-11-15 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Specified the swapchain texture coordinate origin.
-
-
Revision 4, 2018-11-16 (Minmin Gong)
-
Specified Y direction and Z range in clip space
-
-
Revision 5, 2020-08-06 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Added new
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
error code
-
-
Revision 8, 2021-09-09 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Document mapping for
XrSwapchainUsageFlags
-
-
Revision 9, 2021-12-28 (Matthieu Bucchianeri)
-
Added missing
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_DEVICE_INVALID
error condition
-
12.13. XR_KHR_D3D12_enable
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_D3D12_enable
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
29
- Revision
-
9
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2020-03-18
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Bryce Hutchings, Microsoft
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Mark Young, LunarG
Minmin Gong, Microsoft
Dan Ginsburg, Valve
Matthieu Bucchianeri, Microsoft
Overview
This extension enables the use of the D3D12 graphics API in an OpenXR runtime. Without this extension, the OpenXR runtime may not be able to use any D3D12 swapchain images.
This extension provides the mechanisms necessary for an application to generate a valid XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR structure in order to create a D3D12-based XrSession. Note that during this process the application is responsible for creating all the required D3D12 objects, including a graphics device and queue to be used for rendering.
This extension also provides mechanisms for the application to interact with images acquired by calling xrEnumerateSwapchainImages.
In order to expose the structures, types, and functions of this extension,
you must define XR_USE_GRAPHICS_API_D3D12 before including the OpenXR
platform header openxr_platform.h
, in all portions of your library or
application that include it.
Swapchain Image Resource State
When an application acquires a swapchain image by calling xrAcquireSwapchainImage in a session create using XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR, the OpenXR runtime must guarantee that:
-
The color rendering target image has a resource state match with
D3D12_RESOURCE_STATE_RENDER_TARGET
-
The depth rendering target image has a resource state match with
D3D12_RESOURCE_STATE_DEPTH_WRITE
-
The
ID3D12CommandQueue
specified in XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR can write to the image.
When an application releases a swapchain image by calling xrReleaseSwapchainImage, in a session create using XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR, the OpenXR runtime must interpret the image as:
-
Having a resource state match with
D3D12_RESOURCE_STATE_RENDER_TARGET
if the image is a color rendering target -
Having a resource state match with
D3D12_RESOURCE_STATE_DEPTH_WRITE
if the image is a depth rendering target -
Being available for read/write on the
ID3D12CommandQueue
specified in XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR.
The application is responsible for transitioning the swapchain image back to the resource state and queue availability that the OpenXR runtime requires. If the image is not in a resource state match with the above specifications the runtime may exhibit undefined behavior.
All XrSwapchainUsageFlags values passed in a session created using XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR must be interpreted as follows by the runtime, so that the returned swapchain images used by the application may be used as if they were created with the corresponding D3D12_BIND_FLAG flags and heap type. The runtime may set additional resource flags but must not restrict usage.
XrSwapchainUsageFlagBits | Corresponding D3D12 resource flag bits |
---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ignored |
|
ignored |
|
|
|
ignored |
|
ignored |
All D3D12 swapchain textures are created with D3D12_HEAP_TYPE_DEFAULT usage.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_D3D12_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_D3D12_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_D3D12_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The following structures are provided to supply supporting runtimes the necessary information required to work with the D3D12 API executing on certain operating systems.
The XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D12_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
ID3D12Device* device;
ID3D12CommandQueue* queue;
} XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR;
When creating a D3D12-backed XrSession, the application will provide a
pointer to an XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR in the
XrSessionCreateInfo::next
field of structure passed to
xrCreateSession.
The D3D12 device specified in XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR::device
must be created in accordance with the requirements retrieved through
xrGetD3D12GraphicsRequirementsKHR, otherwise xrCreateSession
must return XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_DEVICE_INVALID
.
The XrSwapchainImageD3D12KHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D12_enable
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageD3D12KHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
ID3D12Resource* texture;
} XrSwapchainImageD3D12KHR;
If a given session was created with XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR, the following conditions must apply.
-
Calls to xrEnumerateSwapchainImages on an XrSwapchain in that session must return an array of XrSwapchainImageD3D12KHR structures.
-
Whenever an OpenXR function accepts an XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader pointer as a parameter in that session, the runtime must also accept a pointer to an XrSwapchainImageD3D12KHR.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the top-left corner of the swapchain image as the coordinate origin unless specified otherwise by extension functionality.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the swapchain images in a clip space of positive Y pointing up, near Z plane at 0, and far Z plane at 1.
The XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D12KHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D12_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D12KHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
LUID adapterLuid;
D3D_FEATURE_LEVEL minFeatureLevel;
} XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D12KHR;
XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D12KHR is populated by xrGetD3D12GraphicsRequirementsKHR.
New Functions
Some computer systems may have multiple graphics devices, each of which may have independent external display outputs. XR systems that connect to such graphics devices are typically connected to a single device. Applications need to know what graphics device the XR system is connected to so that they can use that graphics device to generate XR images.
To retrieve the D3D12 feature level and graphics device for an instance and system, call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D12_enable
XrResult xrGetD3D12GraphicsRequirementsKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrGraphicsRequirementsD3D12KHR* graphicsRequirements);
The xrGetD3D12GraphicsRequirementsKHR function identifies to the
application what graphics device (Windows LUID) needs to be used and the
minimum feature level to use.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
(XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
may be returned due to legacy behavior)
on calls to xrCreateSession if xrGetD3D12GraphicsRequirementsKHR
has not been called for the same instance
and systemId
.
The LUID and feature level that xrGetD3D12GraphicsRequirementsKHR
returns must be used to create the ID3D12Device
that the application
passes to xrCreateSession in the XrGraphicsBindingD3D12KHR.
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2018-05-07 (Mark Young)
-
Initial draft
-
-
Revision 2, 2018-06-21 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Split
XR_KHR_D3D_enable
intoXR_KHR_D3D12_enable
-
Rename and expand
xrGetD3DGraphicsDeviceKHR
functionality toxrGetD3D12GraphicsRequirementsKHR
-
-
Revision 3, 2018-11-15 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Specified the swapchain texture coordinate origin.
-
-
Revision 4, 2018-11-16 (Minmin Gong)
-
Specified Y direction and Z range in clip space
-
-
Revision 5, 2019-01-29 (Dan Ginsburg)
-
Added swapchain image resource state details.
-
-
Revision 6, 2020-03-18 (Minmin Gong)
-
Specified depth swapchain image resource state.
-
-
Revision 7, 2020-08-06 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Added new
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
error code
-
-
Revision 8, 2021-09-09 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Document mapping for
XrSwapchainUsageFlags
-
-
Revision 9, 2021-12-28 (Matthieu Bucchianeri)
-
Added missing
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_DEVICE_INVALID
error condition
-
12.14. XR_KHR_loader_init
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_loader_init
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
89
- Revision
-
2
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2023-05-08
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Cass Everitt, Facebook
Robert Blenkinsopp, Ultraleap
Overview
On some platforms, before loading can occur the loader must be initialized with platform-specific parameters.
Unlike other extensions, the presence of this extension is signaled by a
successful call to xrGetInstanceProcAddr to retrieve the function
pointer for xrInitializeLoaderKHR using XR_NULL_HANDLE as the
instance
parameter.
If this extension is supported, its use may be required on some platforms and the use of the xrInitializeLoaderKHR function must precede other OpenXR calls except xrGetInstanceProcAddr.
This function exists as part of the loader library that the application is using and the loader must pass calls to xrInitializeLoaderKHR to the active runtime, and all enabled API layers that expose a xrInitializeLoaderKHR function exposed either through their manifest, or through their implementation of xrGetInstanceProcAddr.
If the xrInitializeLoaderKHR function is discovered through the
manifest, xrInitializeLoaderKHR will be called before
xrNegotiateLoaderRuntimeInterface
or xrNegotiateLoaderApiLayerInterface
has been called on the runtime or layer respectively.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
New Enums
New Structures
The XrLoaderInitInfoBaseHeaderKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_loader_init
typedef struct XrLoaderInitInfoBaseHeaderKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
} XrLoaderInitInfoBaseHeaderKHR;
New Functions
To initialize an OpenXR loader with platform or implementation-specific parameters, call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_loader_init
XrResult xrInitializeLoaderKHR(
const XrLoaderInitInfoBaseHeaderKHR* loaderInitInfo);
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 2, 2023-05-08 (Robert Blenkinsoppp)
-
Explicitly state that the call to xrInitializeLoaderKHR should be passed to the runtime and enabled API layers.
-
-
Revision 1, 2020-05-07 (Cass Everitt)
-
Initial draft
-
12.15. XR_KHR_loader_init_android
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_loader_init_android
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
90
- Revision
-
1
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
Requires
XR_KHR_loader_init
to be enabled
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2020-05-07
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Cass Everitt, Facebook
Overview
On Android, some loader implementations need the application to provide additional information on initialization. This extension defines the parameters needed by such implementations. If this is available on a given implementation, an application must make use of it.
On implementations where use of this is required, the following condition must apply:
-
Whenever an OpenXR function accepts an XrLoaderInitInfoBaseHeaderKHR pointer, the runtime (and loader) must also accept a pointer to an XrLoaderInitInfoAndroidKHR.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_LOADER_INIT_INFO_ANDROID_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The XrLoaderInitInfoAndroidKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_loader_init_android
typedef struct XrLoaderInitInfoAndroidKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
void* applicationVM;
void* applicationContext;
} XrLoaderInitInfoAndroidKHR;
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2020-05-07 (Cass Everitt)
-
Initial draft
-
12.16. XR_KHR_opengl_enable
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_opengl_enable
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
24
- Revision
-
10
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-07-02
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Mark Young, LunarG
Bryce Hutchings, Microsoft
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Minmin Gong, Microsoft
Robert Menzel, NVIDIA
Jakob Bornecrantz, Collabora
Paulo Gomes, Samsung Electronics
Overview
This extension enables the use of the OpenGL graphics API in an OpenXR runtime. Without this extension, the OpenXR runtime may not be able to provide any OpenGL swapchain images.
This extension provides the mechanisms necessary for an application to
generate a valid XrGraphicsBindingOpenGL*KHR
structure in order to
create an OpenGL-based XrSession.
Note that during this process the application is responsible for creating an
OpenGL context to be used for rendering.
The runtime however will provide the OpenGL textures to render into in the
form of a swapchain.
This extension provides mechanisms for the application to interact with images acquired by calling xrEnumerateSwapchainImages.
In order to expose the structures, types, and functions of this extension,
the application must define XR_USE_GRAPHICS_API_OPENGL, as well as an
appropriate window system define supported
by this extension, before including the OpenXR platform header
openxr_platform.h
, in all portions of the library or application that
include it.
The window system defines currently supported by this extension are:
Note that a runtime implementation of this extension is only required to support the structs introduced by this extension which belong to the platform it is running on.
Note that the OpenGL context given to the call xrCreateSession must not be bound in another thread when calling the functions: xrCreateSession, xrDestroySession, xrBeginFrame, xrEndFrame, xrCreateSwapchain, xrDestroySwapchain, xrEnumerateSwapchainImages, xrAcquireSwapchainImage, xrWaitSwapchainImage and xrReleaseSwapchainImage. It may be bound in the thread calling those functions. The runtime must not access the context from any other function. In particular the application must be able to call xrWaitFrame from a different thread than the rendering thread.
Swapchain Flag Bits
All XrSwapchainUsageFlags valid values passed in a session created using XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWin32KHR, XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXlibKHR, XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXcbKHR or XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWaylandKHR should be ignored as there is no mapping to OpenGL texture settings.
Note
In such a session, a runtime may use a supporting graphics API, such as Vulkan, to allocate images that are intended to alias with OpenGL textures, and be part of an XrSwapchain. A runtime which allocates the texture with a different graphics API may need to enable several usage flags on the underlying native texture resource to ensure compatibility with OpenGL. |
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_OPENGL_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_WIN32_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_XLIB_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_XCB_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_WAYLAND_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_OPENGL_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The following structures are provided to supply supporting runtimes the necessary information required to work with the OpenGL API executing on certain operating systems.
These structures are only available when the corresponding
XR_USE_PLATFORM_
macro is defined before including openxr_platform.h
.
The XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWin32KHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWin32KHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
HDC hDC;
HGLRC hGLRC;
} XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWin32KHR;
When creating an OpenGL-backed XrSession on Microsoft Windows, the
application will provide a pointer to an
XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWin32KHR in the next
chain of the
XrSessionCreateInfo.
As no standardized way exists for OpenGL to create the graphics context on a
specific GPU, the runtime must assume that the application uses the
operating systems default GPU.
If the GPU used by the runtime does not match the GPU on which the OpenGL
context of the application got created, xrCreateSession must return
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_DEVICE_INVALID
.
The required window system configuration define to expose this structure type is XR_USE_PLATFORM_WIN32.
The XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXlibKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXlibKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
Display* xDisplay;
uint32_t visualid;
GLXFBConfig glxFBConfig;
GLXDrawable glxDrawable;
GLXContext glxContext;
} XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXlibKHR;
When creating an OpenGL-backed XrSession on any Linux/Unix platform
that utilizes X11 and GLX, via the Xlib library, the application will
provide a pointer to an XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXlibKHR in the next
chain of the XrSessionCreateInfo.
The required window system configuration define to expose this structure type is XR_USE_PLATFORM_XLIB.
The XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXcbKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXcbKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
xcb_connection_t* connection;
uint32_t screenNumber;
xcb_glx_fbconfig_t fbconfigid;
xcb_visualid_t visualid;
xcb_glx_drawable_t glxDrawable;
xcb_glx_context_t glxContext;
} XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXcbKHR;
When creating an OpenGL-backed XrSession on any Linux/Unix platform
that utilizes X11 and GLX, via the Xlib library, the application will
provide a pointer to an XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLXcbKHR in the next
chain of the XrSessionCreateInfo.
The required window system configuration define to expose this structure type is XR_USE_PLATFORM_XCB.
The XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWaylandKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWaylandKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
struct wl_display* display;
} XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWaylandKHR;
When creating an OpenGL-backed XrSession on any Linux/Unix platform
that utilizes the Wayland protocol with its compositor, the application will
provide a pointer to an XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLWaylandKHR in the
next
chain of the XrSessionCreateInfo.
The required window system configuration define to expose this structure type is XR_USE_PLATFORM_WAYLAND.
The XrSwapchainImageOpenGLKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageOpenGLKHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
uint32_t image;
} XrSwapchainImageOpenGLKHR;
If a given session was created with a XrGraphicsBindingOpenGL*KHR
, the
following conditions must apply.
-
Calls to xrEnumerateSwapchainImages on an XrSwapchain in that session must return an array of XrSwapchainImageOpenGLKHR structures.
-
Whenever an OpenXR function accepts an XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader pointer as a parameter in that session, the runtime must also accept a pointer to an XrSwapchainImageOpenGLKHR.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the bottom-left corner of the swapchain image as the coordinate origin unless specified otherwise by extension functionality.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the swapchain images in a clip space of positive Y pointing up, near Z plane at -1, and far Z plane at 1.
The XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLKHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrVersion minApiVersionSupported;
XrVersion maxApiVersionSupported;
} XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLKHR;
XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLKHR is populated by xrGetOpenGLGraphicsRequirementsKHR with the runtime’s OpenGL API version requirements.
New Functions
To query OpenGL API version requirements for an instance and system, call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
XrResult xrGetOpenGLGraphicsRequirementsKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLKHR* graphicsRequirements);
The xrGetOpenGLGraphicsRequirementsKHR function identifies to the
application the minimum OpenGL version requirement and the highest known
tested OpenGL version.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
(XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
may be returned due to legacy behavior)
on calls to xrCreateSession if
xrGetOpenGLGraphicsRequirementsKHR has not been called for the same
instance
and systemId
.
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2018-05-07 (Mark Young)
-
Initial draft
-
-
Revision 2, 2018-06-21 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Add new
xrGetOpenGLGraphicsRequirementsKHR
-
-
Revision 3, 2018-11-15 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Specified the swapchain texture coordinate origin.
-
-
Revision 4, 2018-11-16 (Minmin Gong)
-
Specified Y direction and Z range in clip space
-
-
Revision 5, 2019-01-25 (Robert Menzel)
-
Description updated
-
-
Revision 6, 2019-07-02 (Robert Menzel)
-
Minor fixes
-
-
Revision 7, 2019-07-08 (Rylie Pavlik)
-
Adjusted member name in XCB struct
-
-
Revision 8, 2019-11-28 (Jakob Bornecrantz)
-
Added note about context not allowed to be current in a different thread.
-
-
Revision 9, 2020-08-06 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Added new
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
error code
-
-
Revision 10, 2021-08-31 (Paulo F. Gomes)
-
Document handling of
XrSwapchainUsageFlags
-
12.17. XR_KHR_opengl_es_enable
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_opengl_es_enable
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
25
- Revision
-
8
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-07-12
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Mark Young, LunarG
Bryce Hutchings, Microsoft
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Minmin Gong, Microsoft
Robert Menzel, NVIDIA
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm
Paulo Gomes, Samsung Electronics
Overview
This extension must be provided by runtimes supporting applications using OpenGL ES APIs for rendering. OpenGL ES applications need this extension to obtain compatible swapchain images which the runtime is required to supply. The runtime needs the following OpenGL ES objects from the application in order to interact properly with the OpenGL ES driver: EGLDisplay, EGLConfig and EGLContext.
These are passed from the application to the runtime in a XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLESAndroidKHR structure when creating the XrSession. Although not restricted to Android, the OpenGL ES extension is currently tailored for Android.
Note that the application is responsible for creating the required OpenGL ES objects, including an OpenGL ES context to be used for rendering.
This extension also provides mechanisms for the application to interact with images acquired by calling xrEnumerateSwapchainImages.
In order to expose the structures, types, and functions of this extension,
the application source code must define
XR_USE_GRAPHICS_API_OPENGL_ES, as well as an appropriate
window system define, before including the
OpenXR platform header openxr_platform.h
, in all portions of your library
or application that include it.
The only window system define currently supported by this extension is:
Swapchain Flag Bits
All XrSwapchainUsageFlags valid values passed in a session created using XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLESAndroidKHR should be ignored as there is no mapping to OpenGL ES texture settings.
Note
In such a session, a runtime may use a supporting graphics API, such as Vulkan, to allocate images that are intended to alias with OpenGLES textures, and be part of an XrSwapchain. A runtime which allocates the texture with a different graphics API may need to enable several usage flags on the underlying native texture resource to ensure compatibility with OpenGL ES. |
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_OPENGL_ES_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_ES_ANDROID_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_OPENGL_ES_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The following structures are provided to supply supporting runtimes the necessary information required to work with the OpenGL ES API executing on certain operating systems.
These structures are only available when the corresponding
XR_USE_PLATFORM_
macro is defined before including openxr_platform.h
.
The XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLESAndroidKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_es_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLESAndroidKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
EGLDisplay display;
EGLConfig config;
EGLContext context;
} XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLESAndroidKHR;
When creating an OpenGL ES-backed XrSession on Android, the
application will provide a pointer to an
XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLESAndroidKHR structure in the next
chain
of the XrSessionCreateInfo.
The required window system configuration define to expose this structure type is XR_USE_PLATFORM_ANDROID.
The XrSwapchainImageOpenGLESKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_es_enable
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageOpenGLESKHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
uint32_t image;
} XrSwapchainImageOpenGLESKHR;
If a given session was created with a XrGraphicsBindingOpenGLES*KHR
,
the following conditions must apply.
-
Calls to xrEnumerateSwapchainImages on an XrSwapchain in that session must return an array of XrSwapchainImageOpenGLESKHR structures.
-
Whenever an OpenXR function accepts an XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader pointer as a parameter in that session, the runtime must also accept a pointer to an XrSwapchainImageOpenGLESKHR structure.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the bottom-left corner of the swapchain image as the coordinate origin unless specified otherwise by extension functionality.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the swapchain images in a clip space of positive Y pointing up, near Z plane at -1, and far Z plane at 1.
The XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLESKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_es_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLESKHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrVersion minApiVersionSupported;
XrVersion maxApiVersionSupported;
} XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLESKHR;
XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLESKHR is populated by xrGetOpenGLESGraphicsRequirementsKHR with the runtime’s OpenGL ES API version requirements.
New Functions
To query OpenGL ES API version requirements for an instance and system, call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_es_enable
XrResult xrGetOpenGLESGraphicsRequirementsKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrGraphicsRequirementsOpenGLESKHR* graphicsRequirements);
The xrGetOpenGLESGraphicsRequirementsKHR function identifies to the
application the minimum OpenGL ES version requirement and the highest known
tested OpenGL ES version.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
(XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
may be returned due to legacy behavior)
on calls to xrCreateSession if
xrGetOpenGLESGraphicsRequirementsKHR has not been called for the same
instance
and systemId
.
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2018-05-07 (Mark Young)
-
Initial draft
-
-
Revision 2, 2018-06-21 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Add new
xrGetOpenGLESGraphicsRequirementsKHR
-
-
Revision 3, 2018-11-15 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Specified the swapchain texture coordinate origin.
-
-
Revision 4, 2018-11-16 (Minmin Gong)
-
Specified Y direction and Z range in clip space
-
-
Revision 5, 2019-01-25 (Robert Menzel)
-
Description updated
-
-
Revision 6, 2019-07-12 (Martin Renschler)
-
Description updated
-
-
Revision 7, 2020-08-06 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Added new
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
error code
-
-
Revision 8, 2021-08-27 (Paulo F. Gomes)
-
Document handling of
XrSwapchainUsageFlags
-
12.18. XR_KHR_swapchain_usage_input_attachment_bit
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_swapchain_usage_input_attachment_bit
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
166
- Revision
-
3
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2021-05-11
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Jakob Bornecrantz, Collabora
Rylie Pavlik, Collabora
Overview
This extension enables an application to specify that swapchain images should be created in a way so that they can be used as input attachments. At the time of writing this bit only affects Vulkan swapchains.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrSwapchainUsageFlagBits enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_INPUT_ATTACHMENT_BIT_KHR
- indicates that the image format may be used as an input attachment.
New Enums
New Structures
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2020-07-23 (Jakob Bornecrantz)
-
Initial draft
-
-
Revision 2, 2020-07-24 (Jakob Bornecrantz)
-
Added note about only affecting Vulkan
-
Changed from MNDX to MND
-
-
Revision 3, 2021-05-11 (Rylie Pavlik, Collabora, Ltd.)
-
Updated for promotion from MND to KHR
-
12.19. XR_KHR_visibility_mask
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_visibility_mask
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
32
- Revision
-
2
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2018-07-05
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Alex Turner, Microsoft - Contacts
-
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Overview
This extension support the providing of a per-view drawing mask for applications. The primary purpose of this is to enable performance improvements that result from avoiding drawing on areas that are not visible to the user. A common occurrence in head-mounted VR hardware is that the optical system’s frustum does not intersect precisely with the rectangular display it is viewing. As a result, it may be that there are parts of the display that are not visible to the user, such as the corners of the display. In such cases it would be unnecessary for the application to draw into those parts.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
New Enums
XrVisibilityMaskTypeKHR identifies the different types of mask specification that is supported. The application can request a view mask in any of the formats identified by these types.
// Provided by XR_KHR_visibility_mask
typedef enum XrVisibilityMaskTypeKHR {
XR_VISIBILITY_MASK_TYPE_HIDDEN_TRIANGLE_MESH_KHR = 1,
XR_VISIBILITY_MASK_TYPE_VISIBLE_TRIANGLE_MESH_KHR = 2,
XR_VISIBILITY_MASK_TYPE_LINE_LOOP_KHR = 3,
XR_VISIBILITY_MASK_TYPE_MAX_ENUM_KHR = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrVisibilityMaskTypeKHR;
New Structures
The XrVisibilityMaskKHR structure is an input/output struct which specifies the view mask.
// Provided by XR_KHR_visibility_mask
typedef struct XrVisibilityMaskKHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
uint32_t vertexCapacityInput;
uint32_t vertexCountOutput;
XrVector2f* vertices;
uint32_t indexCapacityInput;
uint32_t indexCountOutput;
uint32_t* indices;
} XrVisibilityMaskKHR;
The XrEventDataVisibilityMaskChangedKHR structure specifies an event which indicates that a given view mask has changed. The application should respond to the event by calling xrGetVisibilityMaskKHR to retrieve the updated mask. This event is per-view, so if the masks for multiple views in a configuration change then multiple instances of this event will be sent to the application, one per view.
// Provided by XR_KHR_visibility_mask
typedef struct XrEventDataVisibilityMaskChangedKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSession session;
XrViewConfigurationType viewConfigurationType;
uint32_t viewIndex;
} XrEventDataVisibilityMaskChangedKHR;
New Functions
The xrGetVisibilityMaskKHR function is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_visibility_mask
XrResult xrGetVisibilityMaskKHR(
XrSession session,
XrViewConfigurationType viewConfigurationType,
uint32_t viewIndex,
XrVisibilityMaskTypeKHR visibilityMaskType,
XrVisibilityMaskKHR* visibilityMask);
xrGetVisibilityMaskKHR retrieves the view mask for a given view.
This function follows the two-call idiom for
filling multiple buffers in a struct.
Specifically, if either XrVisibilityMaskKHR::vertexCapacityInput
or XrVisibilityMaskKHR::indexCapacityInput
is 0
, the runtime
must respond as if both fields were set to 0
, returning the vertex count
and index count through XrVisibilityMaskKHR::vertexCountOutput
or XrVisibilityMaskKHR::indexCountOutput
respectively.
If a view mask for the specified view isn’t available, the returned vertex
and index counts must be 0
.
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2018-07-05 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Initial version.
-
-
Revision 2, 2019-07-15 (Alex Turner)
-
Adjust two-call idiom usage.
-
12.20. XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
26
- Revision
-
8
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-01-25
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Mark Young, LunarG
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Ed Hutchins, Oculus
Andres Rodriguez, Valve
Dan Ginsburg, Valve
Bryce Hutchings, Microsoft
Minmin Gong, Microsoft
Robert Menzel, NVIDIA
Paulo Gomes, Samsung Electronics
Overview
This extension enables the use of the Vulkan graphics API in an OpenXR runtime. Without this extension, the OpenXR runtime may not be able to use any Vulkan swapchain images.
This extension provides the mechanisms necessary for an application to generate a valid XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR structure in order to create a Vulkan-based XrSession. Note that during this process the application is responsible for creating all the required Vulkan objects.
This extension also provides mechanisms for the application to interact with images acquired by calling xrEnumerateSwapchainImages.
In order to expose the structures, types, and functions of this extension,
you must define XR_USE_GRAPHICS_API_VULKAN before including the
OpenXR platform header openxr_platform.h
, in all portions of your library
or application that include it.
Initialization
Some of the requirements for creating a valid
XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR include correct initialization of a
VkInstance
, VkPhysicalDevice
, and VkDevice
.
A runtime may require that the VkInstance
be initialized to a
specific Vulkan API version.
Additionally, the runtime may require a set of instance extensions to be
enabled in the VkInstance
.
These requirements can be queried by the application using
xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirementsKHR and
xrGetVulkanInstanceExtensionsKHR, respectively.
Similarly, the runtime may require the VkDevice
to have a set of
device extensions enabled, which can be queried using
xrGetVulkanDeviceExtensionsKHR.
In order to satisfy the VkPhysicalDevice
requirements, the application
can query xrGetVulkanGraphicsDeviceKHR to identify the correct
VkPhysicalDevice
.
Populating an XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR with a VkInstance
,
VkDevice
, or VkPhysicalDevice
that does not meet the
requirements outlined by this extension may result in undefined behavior by
the OpenXR runtime.
The API version, instance extension, device extension and physical device
requirements only apply to the VkInstance
, VkDevice
, and
VkPhysicalDevice
objects which the application wishes to associate
with an XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR.
Concurrency
Vulkan requires that concurrent access to a VkQueue
from multiple
threads be externally synchronized.
Therefore, OpenXR functions that may access the VkQueue
specified in
the XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR must also be externally synchronized.
The list of OpenXR functions where the OpenXR runtime may access the
VkQueue
are:
The runtime must not access the VkQueue
in any OpenXR function that
is not listed above or in an extension definition.
Swapchain Image Layout
When an application acquires a swapchain image by calling xrAcquireSwapchainImage in a session created using XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR, the OpenXR runtime must guarantee that:
-
The image has a memory layout compatible with
VK_IMAGE_LAYOUT_COLOR_ATTACHMENT_OPTIMAL
for color images, orVK_IMAGE_LAYOUT_DEPTH_STENCIL_ATTACHMENT_OPTIMAL
for depth images. -
The
VkQueue
specified in XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR has ownership of the image.
When an application releases a swapchain image by calling xrReleaseSwapchainImage, in a session created using XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR, the OpenXR runtime must interpret the image as:
-
Having a memory layout compatible with
VK_IMAGE_LAYOUT_COLOR_ATTACHMENT_OPTIMAL
for color images, orVK_IMAGE_LAYOUT_DEPTH_STENCIL_ATTACHMENT_OPTIMAL
for depth images. -
Being owned by the
VkQueue
specified in XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR.
The application is responsible for transitioning the swapchain image back to the image layout and queue ownership that the OpenXR runtime requires. If the image is not in a layout compatible with the above specifications the runtime may exhibit undefined behavior.
Swapchain Flag Bits
All XrSwapchainUsageFlags values passed in a session created using
XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR must be interpreted as follows by the
runtime, so that the returned swapchain images used by the application may
be used as if they were created with at least the specified
VkImageUsageFlagBits
or VkImageCreateFlagBits
set.
XrSwapchainUsageFlagBits | Corresponding Vulkan flag bit |
---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_VULKAN_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_VULKAN_KHR
-
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_VULKAN_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
The following structures are provided to supply supporting runtimes the necessary information required to work with the Vulkan API executing on certain operating systems.
The XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
VkInstance instance;
VkPhysicalDevice physicalDevice;
VkDevice device;
uint32_t queueFamilyIndex;
uint32_t queueIndex;
} XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR;
When creating a Vulkan-backed XrSession, the application will provide
a pointer to an XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR in the next
chain of the
XrSessionCreateInfo.
The XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
VkImage image;
} XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR;
If a given session was created with XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR, the following conditions must apply.
-
Calls to xrEnumerateSwapchainImages on an XrSwapchain in that session must return an array of XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR structures.
-
Whenever an OpenXR function accepts an XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader pointer as a parameter in that session, the runtime must also accept a pointer to an XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the top-left corner of the swapchain image as the coordinate origin unless specified otherwise by extension functionality.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the swapchain images in a clip space of positive Y pointing down, near Z plane at 0, and far Z plane at 1.
The XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR structure is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
typedef struct XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrVersion minApiVersionSupported;
XrVersion maxApiVersionSupported;
} XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR;
XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR is populated by xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirementsKHR with the runtime’s Vulkan API version requirements.
New Functions
To query Vulkan API version requirements, call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
XrResult xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirementsKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR* graphicsRequirements);
The xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirementsKHR function identifies to the
application the minimum Vulkan version requirement and the highest known
tested Vulkan version.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
(XR_ERROR_VALIDATION_FAILURE
may be returned due to legacy behavior)
on calls to xrCreateSession if
xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirementsKHR has not been called for the same
instance
and systemId
.
Some computer systems may have multiple graphics devices, each of which may have independent external display outputs. XR systems that connect to such graphics devices are typically connected to a single device. Applications need to know what graphics device the XR system is connected to so that they can use that graphics device to generate XR images.
To identify what graphics device needs to be used for an instance and system, call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
XrResult xrGetVulkanGraphicsDeviceKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
VkInstance vkInstance,
VkPhysicalDevice* vkPhysicalDevice);
xrGetVulkanGraphicsDeviceKHR function identifies to the application
what graphics device (Vulkan VkPhysicalDevice
) needs to be used.
xrGetVulkanGraphicsDeviceKHR must be called prior to calling
xrCreateSession, and the VkPhysicalDevice
that
xrGetVulkanGraphicsDeviceKHR returns should be passed to
xrCreateSession in the XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR.
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
XrResult xrGetVulkanInstanceExtensionsKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
uint32_t bufferCapacityInput,
uint32_t* bufferCountOutput,
char* buffer);
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
XrResult xrGetVulkanDeviceExtensionsKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
uint32_t bufferCapacityInput,
uint32_t* bufferCountOutput,
char* buffer);
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2018-05-07 (Mark Young)
-
Initial draft
-
-
Revision 2, 2018-06-21 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Replace
session
parameter withinstance
andsystemId
parameters. -
Move
xrGetVulkanDeviceExtensionsKHR
,xrGetVulkanInstanceExtensionsKHR
andxrGetVulkanGraphicsDeviceKHR
functions into this extension -
Add new
XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR
function.
-
-
Revision 3, 2018-11-15 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Specified the swapchain texture coordinate origin.
-
-
Revision 4, 2018-11-16 (Minmin Gong)
-
Specified Y direction and Z range in clip space
-
-
Revision 5, 2019-01-24 (Robert Menzel)
-
Description updated
-
-
Revision 6, 2019-01-25 (Andres Rodriguez)
-
Reword sections of the spec to shift requirements on to the runtime instead of the app
-
-
Revision 7, 2020-08-06 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Added new
XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
error code
-
-
Revision 8, 2021-01-21 (Rylie Pavlik, Collabora, Ltd.)
-
Document mapping for
XrSwapchainUsageFlags
-
12.21. XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
91
- Revision
-
2
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2020-05-04
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Mark Young, LunarG
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Ed Hutchins, Oculus
Andres Rodriguez, Valve
Dan Ginsburg, Valve
Bryce Hutchings, Microsoft
Minmin Gong, Microsoft
Robert Menzel, NVIDIA
Paulo Gomes, Samsung Electronics
12.21.1. Overview
This extension enables the use of the Vulkan graphics API in an OpenXR runtime. Without this extension, the OpenXR runtime may not be able to use any Vulkan swapchain images.
This extension provides the mechanisms necessary for an application to generate a valid XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR structure in order to create a Vulkan-based XrSession.
This extension also provides mechanisms for the application to interact with images acquired by calling xrEnumerateSwapchainImages.
In order to expose the structures, types, and functions of this extension,
you must define XR_USE_GRAPHICS_API_VULKAN before including the
OpenXR platform header openxr_platform.h
, in all portions of your library
or application that include it.
Note
This extension is intended as an alternative to |
12.21.2. Initialization
When operating in Vulkan mode, the OpenXR runtime and the application will share the Vulkan queue described in the XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR structure. This section of the document describes the mechanisms this extension exposes to ensure the shared Vulkan queue is compatible with the runtime and the application’s requirements.
Vulkan Version Requirements
First, a compatible Vulkan version must be agreed upon. To query the runtime’s Vulkan API version requirements an application will call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XrResult xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirements2KHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrSystemId systemId,
XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR* graphicsRequirements);
The xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirements2KHR function identifies to the
application the runtime’s minimum Vulkan version requirement and the highest
known tested Vulkan version.
xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirements2KHR must be called prior to calling
xrCreateSession.
The runtime must return XR_ERROR_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_CALL_MISSING
on calls to xrCreateSession if
xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirements2KHR has not been called for the same
instance
and systemId
.
The XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkan2KHR structure populated by xrGetVulkanGraphicsRequirements2KHR is defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
// XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkan2KHR is an alias for XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR
typedef struct XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
XrVersion minApiVersionSupported;
XrVersion maxApiVersionSupported;
} XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR;
typedef XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkanKHR XrGraphicsRequirementsVulkan2KHR;
Vulkan Instance Creation
Second, a compatible VkInstance
must be created.
The xrCreateVulkanInstanceKHR entry point is a wrapper around
vkCreateInstance intended for this purpose.
When called, the runtime must aggregate the requirements specified by the
application with its own requirements and forward the VkInstance
creation request to the vkCreateInstance
function pointer returned by
pfnGetInstanceProcAddr
.
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XrResult xrCreateVulkanInstanceKHR(
XrInstance instance,
const XrVulkanInstanceCreateInfoKHR* createInfo,
VkInstance* vulkanInstance,
VkResult* vulkanResult);
The XrVulkanInstanceCreateInfoKHR structure contains the input parameters to xrCreateVulkanInstanceKHR.
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
typedef struct XrVulkanInstanceCreateInfoKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSystemId systemId;
XrVulkanInstanceCreateFlagsKHR createFlags;
PFN_vkGetInstanceProcAddr pfnGetInstanceProcAddr;
const VkInstanceCreateInfo* vulkanCreateInfo;
const VkAllocationCallbacks* vulkanAllocator;
} XrVulkanInstanceCreateInfoKHR;
The XrVulkanInstanceCreateInfoKHR::createFlags
member is of the
following type, and contains a bitwise-OR of zero or more of the bits
defined in XrVulkanInstanceCreateFlagBitsKHR.
typedef XrFlags64 XrVulkanInstanceCreateFlagsKHR;
Valid bits for XrVulkanInstanceCreateFlagsKHR are defined by XrVulkanInstanceCreateFlagBitsKHR.
// Flag bits for XrVulkanInstanceCreateFlagsKHR
There are currently no Vulkan instance creation flag bits defined. This is reserved for future use.
Physical Device Selection
Third, a VkPhysicalDevice
must be chosen.
Some computer systems may have multiple graphics devices, each of which may
have independent external display outputs.
The runtime must report a VkPhysicalDevice
that is compatible with
the OpenXR implementation when xrGetVulkanGraphicsDevice2KHR is
invoked.
The application will use this VkPhysicalDevice
to interact with the
OpenXR runtime.
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XrResult xrGetVulkanGraphicsDevice2KHR(
XrInstance instance,
const XrVulkanGraphicsDeviceGetInfoKHR* getInfo,
VkPhysicalDevice* vulkanPhysicalDevice);
The XrVulkanGraphicsDeviceGetInfoKHR structure contains the input parameters to xrCreateVulkanInstanceKHR.
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
typedef struct XrVulkanGraphicsDeviceGetInfoKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSystemId systemId;
VkInstance vulkanInstance;
} XrVulkanGraphicsDeviceGetInfoKHR;
Vulkan Device Creation
Fourth, a compatible VkDevice
must be created.
The xrCreateVulkanDeviceKHR entry point is a wrapper around
vkCreateDevice intended for this purpose.
When called, the runtime must aggregate the requirements specified by the
application with its own requirements and forward the VkDevice
creation request to the vkCreateDevice
function pointer returned by
XrVulkanInstanceCreateInfoKHR::pfnGetInstanceProcAddr
.
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XrResult xrCreateVulkanDeviceKHR(
XrInstance instance,
const XrVulkanDeviceCreateInfoKHR* createInfo,
VkDevice* vulkanDevice,
VkResult* vulkanResult);
The XrVulkanDeviceCreateInfoKHR structure contains the input parameters to xrCreateVulkanDeviceKHR.
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
typedef struct XrVulkanDeviceCreateInfoKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
XrSystemId systemId;
XrVulkanDeviceCreateFlagsKHR createFlags;
PFN_vkGetInstanceProcAddr pfnGetInstanceProcAddr;
VkPhysicalDevice vulkanPhysicalDevice;
const VkDeviceCreateInfo* vulkanCreateInfo;
const VkAllocationCallbacks* vulkanAllocator;
} XrVulkanDeviceCreateInfoKHR;
If the vulkanPhysicalDevice
parameter does not match the output of
xrGetVulkanGraphicsDeviceKHR, then the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_HANDLE_INVALID
.
XrVulkanDeviceCreateFlagsKHR specify details of device creation.
The XrVulkanDeviceCreateInfoKHR::createFlags
member is of the
following type, and contains a bitwise-OR of zero or more of the bits
defined in XrVulkanDeviceCreateFlagBitsKHR.
typedef XrFlags64 XrVulkanDeviceCreateFlagsKHR;
Valid bits for XrVulkanDeviceCreateFlagsKHR are defined by XrVulkanDeviceCreateFlagBitsKHR.
// Flag bits for XrVulkanDeviceCreateFlagsKHR
There are currently no Vulkan device creation flag bits defined. This is reserved for future use.
Queue Selection
Last, the application selects a VkQueue
from the VkDevice
that
has the VK_QUEUE_GRAPHICS_BIT
set.
Note
The runtime may schedule work on the |
Vulkan Graphics Binding
When creating a Vulkan-backed XrSession, the application will chain a pointer to an XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR to the XrSessionCreateInfo parameter of xrCreateSession. With the data collected in the previous sections, the application now has all the necessary information to populate an XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR structure for session creation.
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
// XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR is an alias for XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR
typedef struct XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
VkInstance instance;
VkPhysicalDevice physicalDevice;
VkDevice device;
uint32_t queueFamilyIndex;
uint32_t queueIndex;
} XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR;
typedef XrGraphicsBindingVulkanKHR XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR;
Populating an XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR structure with a member that does not meet the requirements outlined by this extension may result in undefined behavior by the OpenXR runtime.
The requirements outlined in this extension only apply to the
VkInstance
, VkDevice
, VkPhysicalDevice
and VkQueue
objects which the application wishes to associate with an
XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR.
12.21.3. Concurrency
Vulkan requires that concurrent access to a VkQueue
from multiple
threads be externally synchronized.
Therefore, OpenXR functions that may access the VkQueue
specified in
the XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR must also be externally synchronized
by the OpenXR application.
The list of OpenXR functions where the OpenXR runtime may access the
VkQueue
are:
The runtime must not access the VkQueue
in any OpenXR function that
is not listed above or in an extension definition.
Failure by the application to synchronize access to VkQueue
may
result in undefined behavior in the OpenXR runtime.
12.21.4. Swapchain Interactions
Swapchain Images
When an application interacts with XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader structures in a Vulkan-backed XrSession, the application can interpret these to be XrSwapchainImageVulkan2KHR structures. These are defined as:
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
// XrSwapchainImageVulkan2KHR is an alias for XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR
typedef struct XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR {
XrStructureType type;
void* next;
VkImage image;
} XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR;
typedef XrSwapchainImageVulkanKHR XrSwapchainImageVulkan2KHR;
If a given session was created with XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR, the following conditions must apply.
-
Calls to xrEnumerateSwapchainImages on an XrSwapchain in that session must return an array of XrSwapchainImageVulkan2KHR structures.
-
Whenever an OpenXR function accepts an XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader pointer as a parameter in that session, the runtime must also accept a pointer to an XrSwapchainImageVulkan2KHR.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the top-left corner of the swapchain image as the coordinate origin unless specified otherwise by extension functionality.
The OpenXR runtime must interpret the swapchain images in a clip space of positive Y pointing down, near Z plane at 0, and far Z plane at 1.
Swapchain Image Layout
When an application acquires a swapchain image by calling xrAcquireSwapchainImage in a session created using XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR, the OpenXR runtime must guarantee that:
-
The image has a memory layout compatible with
VK_IMAGE_LAYOUT_COLOR_ATTACHMENT_OPTIMAL
for color images, orVK_IMAGE_LAYOUT_DEPTH_STENCIL_ATTACHMENT_OPTIMAL
for depth images. -
The
VkQueue
specified in XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR has ownership of the image.
When an application releases a swapchain image by calling xrReleaseSwapchainImage, in a session created using XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR, the OpenXR runtime must interpret the image as:
-
Having a memory layout compatible with
VK_IMAGE_LAYOUT_COLOR_ATTACHMENT_OPTIMAL
for color images, orVK_IMAGE_LAYOUT_DEPTH_STENCIL_ATTACHMENT_OPTIMAL
for depth images. -
Being owned by the
VkQueue
specified in XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR. -
Being referenced by command buffers submitted to the
VkQueue
specified in XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR which have not yet completed execution.
The application is responsible for transitioning the swapchain image back to the image layout and queue ownership that the OpenXR runtime requires. If the image is not in a layout compatible with the above specifications the runtime may exhibit undefined behavior.
Swapchain Flag Bits
All XrSwapchainUsageFlags values passed in a session created using
XrGraphicsBindingVulkan2KHR must be interpreted as follows by the
runtime, so that the returned swapchain images used by the application may
be used as if they were created with at least the specified
VkImageUsageFlagBits
or VkImageCreateFlagBits
set.
XrSwapchainUsageFlagBits | Corresponding Vulkan flag bit |
---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
12.21.5. Appendix
Questions
-
Should the xrCreateVulkanDeviceKHR and xrCreateVulkanInstanceKHR functions have an output parameter that returns the combined list of parameters used to create the Vulkan device/instance?
-
No. If the application is interested in capturing this data it can set the
pfnGetInstanceProcAddr
parameter to a local callback that captures the relevant information.
-
Quick Reference
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
-
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_VULKAN2_KHR
(alias ofXR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_VULKAN_KHR
) -
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_VULKAN2_KHR
(alias ofXR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_VULKAN_KHR
) -
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_VULKAN2_KHR
(alias ofXR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_VULKAN_KHR
)
12.22. XR_KHR_vulkan_swapchain_format_list
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_vulkan_swapchain_format_list
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
15
- Revision
-
4
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
Requires
XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
to be enabled
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2020-01-01
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Dan Ginsburg, Valve
Overview
Vulkan has the VK_KHR_image_format_list
extension which allows
applications to tell the vkCreateImage
function which formats the
application intends to use when VK_IMAGE_CREATE_MUTABLE_FORMAT_BIT
is
specified.
This OpenXR extension exposes that Vulkan extension to OpenXR applications.
In the same way that a Vulkan-based application can pass a
VkImageFormatListCreateInfo
struct to the vkCreateImage
function, an OpenXR application can pass an identically configured
XrVulkanSwapchainFormatListCreateInfoKHR structure to
xrCreateSwapchain.
Applications using this extension to specify more than one swapchain format
must create OpenXR swapchains with the
XR_SWAPCHAIN_USAGE_MUTABLE_FORMAT_BIT
bit set.
Runtimes implementing this extension must support the
XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
or the XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
extension.
When XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
is used, the runtime must add
VK_KHR_image_format_list
to the list of extensions enabled in
xrCreateVulkanDeviceKHR.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
XrStructureType enumeration is extended with:
XR_TYPE_VULKAN_SWAPCHAIN_FORMAT_LIST_CREATE_INFO_KHR
New Enums
New Structures
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_swapchain_format_list
typedef struct XrVulkanSwapchainFormatListCreateInfoKHR {
XrStructureType type;
const void* next;
uint32_t viewFormatCount;
const VkFormat* viewFormats;
} XrVulkanSwapchainFormatListCreateInfoKHR;
New Functions
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2017-09-13 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Initial proposal.
-
-
Revision 2, 2018-06-21 (Bryce Hutchings)
-
Update reference of
XR_KHR_vulkan_extension_requirements
toXR_KHR_vulkan_enable
-
-
Revision 3, 2020-01-01 (Andres Rodriguez)
-
Update for
XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
-
-
Revision 4, 2021-01-21 (Rylie Pavlik, Collabora, Ltd.)
-
Fix reference to the mutable-format bit in Vulkan.
-
12.23. XR_KHR_win32_convert_performance_counter_time
- Name String
-
XR_KHR_win32_convert_performance_counter_time
- Extension Type
-
Instance extension
- Registered Extension Number
-
36
- Revision
-
1
- Extension and Version Dependencies
-
-
Requires support for OpenXR 1.0
-
- Last Modified Date
-
2019-01-24
- IP Status
-
No known IP claims.
- Contributors
-
Paul Pedriana, Oculus
Bryce Hutchings, Microsoft
Overview
This extension provides two functions for converting between the Windows
performance counter (QPC) time stamps and XrTime
.
The xrConvertWin32PerformanceCounterToTimeKHR function converts from
Windows performance counter time stamps to XrTime
, while the
xrConvertTimeToWin32PerformanceCounterKHR function converts
XrTime
to Windows performance counter time stamps.
The primary use case for this functionality is to be able to synchronize
events between the local system and the OpenXR system.
New Object Types
New Flag Types
New Enum Constants
New Enums
New Structures
New Functions
To convert from a Windows performance counter time stamp to XrTime
,
call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_win32_convert_performance_counter_time
XrResult xrConvertWin32PerformanceCounterToTimeKHR(
XrInstance instance,
const LARGE_INTEGER* performanceCounter,
XrTime* time);
The xrConvertWin32PerformanceCounterToTimeKHR function converts a time
stamp obtained by the QueryPerformanceCounter
Windows function to the
equivalent XrTime
.
If the output time
cannot represent the input
performanceCounter
, the runtime must return
XR_ERROR_TIME_INVALID
.
To convert from XrTime
to a Windows performance counter time stamp,
call:
// Provided by XR_KHR_win32_convert_performance_counter_time
XrResult xrConvertTimeToWin32PerformanceCounterKHR(
XrInstance instance,
XrTime time,
LARGE_INTEGER* performanceCounter);
The xrConvertTimeToWin32PerformanceCounterKHR function converts an
XrTime
to time as if generated by the QueryPerformanceCounter
Windows function.
If the output performanceCounter
cannot represent the input
time
, the runtime must return XR_ERROR_TIME_INVALID
.
Issues
Version History
-
Revision 1, 2019-01-24 (Paul Pedriana)
-
Initial draft
-
Index
Flags and Flag Bits
-
XrCompositionLayerFlags — See also XrCompositionLayerFlagBits
-
XrInputSourceLocalizedNameFlags — See also XrInputSourceLocalizedNameFlagBits
-
XrInstanceCreateFlags — See also XrInstanceCreateFlagBits
-
XrSessionCreateFlags — See also XrSessionCreateFlagBits
-
XrSpaceLocationFlags — See also XrSpaceLocationFlagBits
-
XrSpaceVelocityFlags — See also XrSpaceVelocityFlagBits
-
XrSwapchainCreateFlags — See also XrSwapchainCreateFlagBits
-
XrSwapchainUsageFlags — See also XrSwapchainUsageFlagBits
-
XrViewStateFlags — See also XrViewStateFlagBits
-
XrVulkanDeviceCreateFlagsKHR — See also XrVulkanDeviceCreateFlagBitsKHR
-
XrVulkanInstanceCreateFlagsKHR — See also XrVulkanInstanceCreateFlagBitsKHR
Appendix
Code Style Conventions
These are the code style conventions used in this specification to define the API.
Prefixes are used in the API to denote specific semantic meaning of names, or as a label to avoid name clashes, and are explained here:
Prefix | Description |
---|---|
|
Enumerants and defines are prefixed with these characters. |
|
Non-function-pointer types are prefixed with these characters. |
|
Functions are prefixed with these characters. |
|
Function pointer types are prefixed with these characters. |
Application Binary Interface
This section describes additional definitions and conventions that define the application binary interface.
Structure Types
typedef enum XrStructureType {
XR_TYPE_UNKNOWN = 0,
XR_TYPE_API_LAYER_PROPERTIES = 1,
XR_TYPE_EXTENSION_PROPERTIES = 2,
XR_TYPE_INSTANCE_CREATE_INFO = 3,
XR_TYPE_SYSTEM_GET_INFO = 4,
XR_TYPE_SYSTEM_PROPERTIES = 5,
XR_TYPE_VIEW_LOCATE_INFO = 6,
XR_TYPE_VIEW = 7,
XR_TYPE_SESSION_CREATE_INFO = 8,
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_CREATE_INFO = 9,
XR_TYPE_SESSION_BEGIN_INFO = 10,
XR_TYPE_VIEW_STATE = 11,
XR_TYPE_FRAME_END_INFO = 12,
XR_TYPE_HAPTIC_VIBRATION = 13,
XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_BUFFER = 16,
XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_INSTANCE_LOSS_PENDING = 17,
XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_SESSION_STATE_CHANGED = 18,
XR_TYPE_ACTION_STATE_BOOLEAN = 23,
XR_TYPE_ACTION_STATE_FLOAT = 24,
XR_TYPE_ACTION_STATE_VECTOR2F = 25,
XR_TYPE_ACTION_STATE_POSE = 27,
XR_TYPE_ACTION_SET_CREATE_INFO = 28,
XR_TYPE_ACTION_CREATE_INFO = 29,
XR_TYPE_INSTANCE_PROPERTIES = 32,
XR_TYPE_FRAME_WAIT_INFO = 33,
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_PROJECTION = 35,
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_QUAD = 36,
XR_TYPE_REFERENCE_SPACE_CREATE_INFO = 37,
XR_TYPE_ACTION_SPACE_CREATE_INFO = 38,
XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_REFERENCE_SPACE_CHANGE_PENDING = 40,
XR_TYPE_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_VIEW = 41,
XR_TYPE_SPACE_LOCATION = 42,
XR_TYPE_SPACE_VELOCITY = 43,
XR_TYPE_FRAME_STATE = 44,
XR_TYPE_VIEW_CONFIGURATION_PROPERTIES = 45,
XR_TYPE_FRAME_BEGIN_INFO = 46,
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_PROJECTION_VIEW = 48,
XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_EVENTS_LOST = 49,
XR_TYPE_INTERACTION_PROFILE_SUGGESTED_BINDING = 51,
XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_INTERACTION_PROFILE_CHANGED = 52,
XR_TYPE_INTERACTION_PROFILE_STATE = 53,
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_ACQUIRE_INFO = 55,
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_WAIT_INFO = 56,
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_RELEASE_INFO = 57,
XR_TYPE_ACTION_STATE_GET_INFO = 58,
XR_TYPE_HAPTIC_ACTION_INFO = 59,
XR_TYPE_SESSION_ACTION_SETS_ATTACH_INFO = 60,
XR_TYPE_ACTIONS_SYNC_INFO = 61,
XR_TYPE_BOUND_SOURCES_FOR_ACTION_ENUMERATE_INFO = 62,
XR_TYPE_INPUT_SOURCE_LOCALIZED_NAME_GET_INFO = 63,
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_cube
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_CUBE_KHR = 1000006000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_android_create_instance
XR_TYPE_INSTANCE_CREATE_INFO_ANDROID_KHR = 1000008000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_depth
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_DEPTH_INFO_KHR = 1000010000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_swapchain_format_list
XR_TYPE_VULKAN_SWAPCHAIN_FORMAT_LIST_CREATE_INFO_KHR = 1000014000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_cylinder
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_CYLINDER_KHR = 1000017000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_equirect
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_EQUIRECT_KHR = 1000018000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_WIN32_KHR = 1000023000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_XLIB_KHR = 1000023001,
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_XCB_KHR = 1000023002,
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_WAYLAND_KHR = 1000023003,
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_OPENGL_KHR = 1000023004,
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_OPENGL_KHR = 1000023005,
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_es_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_OPENGL_ES_ANDROID_KHR = 1000024001,
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_es_enable
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_OPENGL_ES_KHR = 1000024002,
// Provided by XR_KHR_opengl_es_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_OPENGL_ES_KHR = 1000024003,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_VULKAN_KHR = 1000025000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_VULKAN_KHR = 1000025001,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_VULKAN_KHR = 1000025002,
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D11_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_D3D11_KHR = 1000027000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D11_enable
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_D3D11_KHR = 1000027001,
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D11_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_D3D11_KHR = 1000027002,
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D12_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_D3D12_KHR = 1000028000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D12_enable
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_D3D12_KHR = 1000028001,
// Provided by XR_KHR_D3D12_enable
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_D3D12_KHR = 1000028002,
// Provided by XR_KHR_visibility_mask
XR_TYPE_VISIBILITY_MASK_KHR = 1000031000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_visibility_mask
XR_TYPE_EVENT_DATA_VISIBILITY_MASK_CHANGED_KHR = 1000031001,
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_color_scale_bias
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_COLOR_SCALE_BIAS_KHR = 1000034000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_loader_init_android
XR_TYPE_LOADER_INIT_INFO_ANDROID_KHR = 1000089000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XR_TYPE_VULKAN_INSTANCE_CREATE_INFO_KHR = 1000090000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XR_TYPE_VULKAN_DEVICE_CREATE_INFO_KHR = 1000090001,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XR_TYPE_VULKAN_GRAPHICS_DEVICE_GET_INFO_KHR = 1000090003,
// Provided by XR_KHR_composition_layer_equirect2
XR_TYPE_COMPOSITION_LAYER_EQUIRECT2_KHR = 1000091000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_binding_modification
XR_TYPE_BINDING_MODIFICATIONS_KHR = 1000120000,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_VULKAN2_KHR = XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_BINDING_VULKAN_KHR,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_VULKAN2_KHR = XR_TYPE_SWAPCHAIN_IMAGE_VULKAN_KHR,
// Provided by XR_KHR_vulkan_enable2
XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_VULKAN2_KHR = XR_TYPE_GRAPHICS_REQUIREMENTS_VULKAN_KHR,
XR_STRUCTURE_TYPE_MAX_ENUM = 0x7FFFFFFF
} XrStructureType;
Most structures containing type
members have a value of type
matching the type of the structure, as described more fully in
Valid Usage for Structure Types.
Note that all extension enums begin at the extension enum base of 10^9 (base 10). Each extension is assigned a block of 1000 enums, starting at the enum base and arranged by the extension’s number.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_EXTENSION_ENUM_BASE 1000000000
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_EXTENSION_ENUM_STRIDE 1000
For example, if extension number 5 wants to use an enum value of 3, the final enum is computed by:
enum = XR_EXTENSION_ENUM_BASE + (extension_number - 1) * XR_EXTENSION_ENUM_STRIDE + enum_value
1000004003 = 1000000000 + 4 * 1000 + 3
The maximum allowed enum value in an extension is 2,147,482,999, which belongs to extension number 2147483.
Flag Types
Flag types are all bitmasks aliasing the base type XrFlags64
and
with corresponding bit flag types defining the valid bits for that flag, as
described in Valid Usage for Flags.
Flag types defined in the core specification were originally listed/defined
here, but have been moved to be adjacent to their associated FlagBits
type.
See the Index for a list.
General Macro Definitions
This API is defined in C and uses "C" linkage.
The openxr.h
header file is opened with:
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif
and closed with:
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif
The supplied openxr.h
header defines a small number of C preprocessor
macros that are described below.
Version Number Macros
Two version numbers are defined in openxr.h
.
Each is packed into a 32-bit integer as described in
API Version Number Function-like
Macros.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
// OpenXR current version number.
#define XR_CURRENT_API_VERSION XR_MAKE_VERSION(1, 0, 34)
XR_CURRENT_API_VERSION is the current version of the OpenXR API.
API Version Number Function-like Macros
API Version Numbers are three components, packed into a single 64-bit integer. The following macros manipulate version components and packed version numbers.
#define XR_MAKE_VERSION(major, minor, patch) \
((((major) & 0xffffULL) << 48) | (((minor) & 0xffffULL) << 32) | ((patch) & 0xffffffffULL))
XR_MAKE_VERSION constructs a packed 64-bit integer API version number from three components. The format used is described in API Version Numbers and Semantics.
This macro can be used when constructing the
XrApplicationInfo::apiVersion
parameter passed to
xrCreateInstance.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_VERSION_MAJOR(version) (uint16_t)(((uint64_t)(version) >> 48)& 0xffffULL)
XR_VERSION_MAJOR extracts the API major version number from a packed version number.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_VERSION_MINOR(version) (uint16_t)(((uint64_t)(version) >> 32) & 0xffffULL)
XR_VERSION_MINOR extracts the API minor version number from a packed version number.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#define XR_VERSION_PATCH(version) (uint32_t)((uint64_t)(version) & 0xffffffffULL)
XR_VERSION_PATCH extracts the API patch version number from a packed version number.
Handle and Atom Macros
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#if !defined(XR_DEFINE_HANDLE)
#if (XR_PTR_SIZE == 8)
#define XR_DEFINE_HANDLE(object) typedef struct object##_T* object;
#else
#define XR_DEFINE_HANDLE(object) typedef uint64_t object;
#endif
#endif
XR_DEFINE_HANDLE defines a handle type, which is an opaque 64 bit value, which may be implemented as an opaque, distinct pointer type on platforms with 64 bit pointers.
For further details, see Handles.
// Provided by XR_VERSION_1_0
#if !defined(XR_NULL_HANDLE)
#if (XR_PTR_SIZE == 8) && XR_CPP_NULLPTR_SUPPORTED
#define XR_NULL_HANDLE nullptr
#else
#define XR_NULL_HANDLE 0
#endif
#endif
XR_NULL_HANDLE is a reserved value representing a non-valid object handle. It may be passed to and returned from API functions only when specifically allowed.
#if !defined(XR_DEFINE_ATOM)
#define XR_DEFINE_ATOM(object) typedef uint64_t object;
#endif
XR_DEFINE_ATOM defines an atom type, which is an opaque 64 bit integer.
Platform-Specific Macro Definitions
Additional platform-specific macros and interfaces are defined using the
included openxr_platform.h
file.
These macros are used to control platform-dependent behavior, and their
exact definitions are under the control of specific platform implementations
of the API.
Platform-Specific Calling Conventions
On many platforms the following macros are empty strings, causing platform- and compiler-specific default calling conventions to be used.
XRAPI_ATTR is a macro placed before the return type of an API function declaration. This macro controls calling conventions for C++11 and GCC/Clang-style compilers.
XRAPI_CALL is a macro placed after the return type of an API function declaration. This macro controls calling conventions for MSVC-style compilers.
XRAPI_PTR is a macro placed between the ( and * in API function pointer declarations. This macro also controls calling conventions, and typically has the same definition as XRAPI_ATTR or XRAPI_CALL, depending on the compiler.
Examples:
Function declaration:
XRAPI_ATTR <return_type> XRAPI_CALL <function_name>(<function_parameters>);
Function pointer type declaration:
typedef <return_type> (XRAPI_PTR *PFN_<function_name>)(<function_parameters>);
Platform-Specific Header Control
If the XR_NO_STDINT_H macro is defined by the application at compile
time, before including any OpenXR header, extended integer types normally
found in <stdint.h>
and used by the OpenXR headers, such as uint8_t
,
must also be defined (as typedef
or with the preprocessor) before
including any OpenXR header.
Otherwise, openxr.h
and related headers will not compile.
If XR_NO_STDINT_H is not defined, the system-provided <stdint.h>
is
used to define these types.
There is a fallback path for Microsoft Visual Studio version 2008 and
earlier versions (which lack this header) that is automatically activated as
needed.
Android Notes
Android specific notes for using the OpenXR specification.
Android Runtime category tag for immersive mode selection
Android applications should add the <category
android:name="org.khronos.openxr.intent.category.IMMERSIVE_HMD" />
tag
inside the intent-filter to indicate that the activity starts in an
immersive OpenXR mode and will not touch the native Android 2D surface.
The HMD suffix indicates the preferred form-factor used by the application and can be used by launchers to filter applications listed.
For example:
<intent-filter>
<action android:name="android.intent.action.MAIN" />
<category android:name="android.intent.category.LAUNCHER" />
<category android:name="org.khronos.openxr.intent.category.IMMERSIVE_HMD" />
</intent-filter>
Glossary
The terms defined in this section are used throughout this Specification. Capitalization is not significant for these definitions.
Term | Description |
---|---|
Application |
The XR application which calls the OpenXR API to communicate with an OpenXR runtime. |
Deprecated |
A feature/extension is deprecated if it is no longer recommended as the correct or best way to achieve its intended purpose. Generally a newer feature/extension will have been created that solves the same problem - in cases where no newer alternative feature exists, justification should be provided. |
Handle |
An opaque integer or pointer value used to refer to an object. Each object type has a unique handle type. |
Haptic |
Haptic or kinesthetic communication recreates the sense of touch by applying forces, vibrations, or motions to the user. |
In-Process |
Something that executes in the application’s process. |
Instance |
The top-level object, which represents the application’s connection to the runtime. Represented by an XrInstance object. |
Normalized |
A value that is interpreted as being in the range [0,1], or a vector whose norm is in that range, as a result of being implicitly divided or scaled by some other value. |
Out-Of-Process |
Something that executes outside the application’s process. |
Promoted |
A feature is promoted if it is taken from an older extension and made available as part of a new core version of the API, or a newer extension that is considered to be either as widely supported or more so. A promoted feature may have minor differences from the original such as:
|
Provisional |
A feature is released provisionally in order to get wider feedback on the functionality before it is finalized. Provisional features may change in ways that break backwards compatibility, and thus are not recommended for use in production applications. |
Required Extensions |
Extensions that must be enabled alongside extensions dependent on them, or that must be enabled to use given hardware. |
Runtime |
The software which implements the OpenXR API and allows applications to interact with XR hardware. |
Swapchain |
A resource that represents a chain of images in device memory. Represented by an XrSwapchain object. |
Swapchain Image |
Each element in a swapchain. Commonly these are simple formatted 2D images, but in other cases they may be array images. Represented by a structure related to XrSwapchainImageBaseHeader. |
Abbreviations
Abbreviations and acronyms are sometimes used in the API where they are considered clear and commonplace, and are defined here:
Abbreviation | Description |
---|---|
API |
Application Programming Interface |
AR |
Augmented Reality |
ER |
Eye Relief |
IAD |
Inter Axial Distance |
IPD |
Inter Pupillary Distance |
MR |
Mixed Reality |
OS |
Operating System |
TSG |
Technical Sub-Group. A specialized sub-group within a Khronos Working Group (WG). |
VR |
Virtual Reality |
WG |
Working Group. An organized group of people working to define/augment an API. |
XR |
VR + AR + MR |
Dedication (Informative)
In memory of Johannes van Waveren: a loving father, husband, son, brother, colleague, and dear friend.
Johannes, known to his friends as "JP", had a great sense of humor, fierce loyalty, intense drive, a love of rainbow unicorns, and deep disdain for processed American cheese. Perhaps most distinguishing of all, though, was his love of technology and his extraordinary technical ability.
JP’s love of technology started at an early age --- instead of working on his homework, he built train sets, hovercrafts, and complex erector sets from scratch; fashioned a tool for grabbing loose change out of street grates; and played computer games. The passion for computer games continued at Delft University of Technology, where, armed with a T1 internet connection and sheer talent, he regularly destroyed his foes in arena matches without being seen, earning him the moniker "MrElusive". During this time, he wrote the Gladiator-bot AI, which earned him acclaim in the community and led directly to a job at the iconic American computer game company, id Software. From there, he quickly became an expert in every system he touched, contributing significantly to every facet of the technology: AI, path navigation, networking, skeletal animation, virtual texturing, advanced rendering, and physics. He became a master of all. He famously owned more lines of code than anyone else, but he was also a generous mentor, helping junior developers hone their skills and make their own contributions.
When the chance to work in the VR industry arose, he saw it as an opportunity to help shape the future. Having never worked on VR hardware did not phase him; he quickly became a top expert in the field. Many of his contributions directly moved the industry forward, most recently his work on asynchronous timewarp and open-standards development.
Time was not on his side. Even in his final days, JP worked tirelessly on the initial proposal for this specification. The treatments he had undergone took a tremendous physical toll, but he continued to work because of his love of technology, his dedication to the craft, and his desire to get OpenXR started on a solid footing. His focus was unwavering.
His proposal was unofficially adopted several days before his passing - and upon hearing, he mustered the energy for a smile. While it was his great dream to see this process through, he would be proud of the spirit of cooperation, passion, and dedication of the industry peers who took up the torch to drive this specification to completion.
JP lived a life full of accomplishment, as evidenced by many publications, credits, awards, and nominations where you will find his name. A less obvious accomplishment --- but of equal importance --- is the influence he had on people through his passionate leadership. He strove for excellence in everything that he did. He was always excited to talk about technology and share the discoveries made while working through complex problems. He created excitement and interest around engineering and technical excellence. He was a mentor and teacher who inspired those who knew him and many continue to benefit from his hard work and generosity.
JP was a rare gem; fantastically brilliant intellectually, but also warm, compassionate, generous, humble, and funny. Those of us lucky enough to have crossed paths with him knew what a privilege and great honor it was to know him. He is certainly missed.
Contributors (Informative)
OpenXR is the result of contributions from many people and companies participating in the Khronos OpenXR Working Group. Members of the Working Group, including the company that they represented at the time of their most recent contribution, are listed below.
Contributors to OpenXR 1.0
-
Adam Gousetis, Google
-
Alex Turner, Microsoft
-
Andreas Loeve Selvik, Arm
-
Andres Rodriguez, Valve Software
-
Armelle Laine, Qualcomm Technologies, Inc
-
Attila Maczak, CTRL-labs
-
Blake Taylor, Magic Leap
-
Brad Grantham, Google
-
Brandon Jones, Google
-
Brent E. Insko, Intel
-
Brent Wilson, Microsoft
-
Bryce Hutchings, Microsoft
-
Cass Everitt, Facebook
-
Charles Egenbacher, Epic Games
-
Chris Osborn, CTRL-labs
-
Christine Perey, Perey Research & Consulting
-
Christoph Haag, Collabora, Ltd.
-
Craig Donner, Google
-
Dan Ginsburg, Valve Software
-
Dave Houlton, LunarG
-
Dave Shreiner, Unity Technologies
-
Denny Rönngren, Tobii
-
Dmitriy Vasilev, Samsung Electronics
-
Doug Twileager, ZSpace
-
Ed Hutchins, Facebook
-
Gloria Kennickell, Facebook
-
Gregory Greeby, AMD
-
Guodong Chen, Huawei
-
Jack Pritz, Unity Technologies
-
Jakob Bornecrantz, Collabora, Ltd.
-
Jared Cheshier, PlutoVR
-
Javier Martinez, Intel
-
Jeff Bellinghausen, Valve Software
-
Jiehua Guo, Huawei
-
Joe Ludwig, Valve Software
-
Johannes van Waveren, Facebook
-
Jon Leech, Khronos
-
Jonathan Wright, Facebook
-
Juan Wee, Samsung Electronics
-
Jules Blok, Epic Games
-
Karl Schultz, LunarG
-
Kaye Mason, Google
-
Krzysztof Kosiński, Google
-
Lachlan Ford, Microsoft
-
Lubosz Sarnecki, Collabora, Ltd.
-
Mark Young, LunarG
-
Martin Renschler, Qualcomm Technologies, Inc.
-
Matias Koskela, Tampere University of Technology
-
Matt Wash, Arm
-
Mattias Brand, Tobii
-
Mattias O. Karlsson, Tobii
-
Michael Gatson, Dell
-
Minmin Gong, Microsoft
-
Mitch Singer, AMD
-
Nell Waliczek, Microsoft
-
Nick Whiting, Epic Games
-
Nigel Williams, Sony
-
Paul Pedriana, Facebook
-
Paulo Gomes, Samsung Electronics
-
Peter Kuhn, Unity Technologies
-
Peter Peterson, HP Inc.
-
Philippe Harscoet, Samsung Electronics
-
Pierre-Loup Griffais, Valve Software
-
Rajeev Gupta, Sony
-
Remi Arnaud, Starbreeze
-
Remy Zimmerman, Logitech
-
River Gillis, Google
-
Robert Memmott, Facebook
-
Robert Menzel, NVIDIA
-
Robert Simpson, Qualcomm Technologies, Inc.
-
Robin Bourianes, Starbreeze
-
Rylie Pavlik, Collabora, Ltd.
-
Ryan Vance, Epic Games
-
Sam Martin, Arm
-
Satish Salian, NVIDIA
-
Scott Flynn, Unity Technologies
-
Sean Payne, CTRL-labs
-
Sophia Baldonado, PlutoVR
-
Steve Smith, Epic Games
-
Sungye Kim, Intel
-
Tom Flynn, Samsung Electronics
-
Trevor F. Smith, Mozilla
-
Vivek Viswanathan, Dell
-
Yin Li, Microsoft
-
Yuval Boger, Sensics
-
Zheng Qin, Microsoft